Canon Security Camera vb s30D User Manual

Network Camera  
Network Camera  
Operation Guide  
ENGLISH  
Be sure to read this Operation Guide before using the network camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Trademark Notice  
Only for European Union and EEA (Norway,  
Iceland and Liechtenstein)  
• Canon and the Canon logo are registered trademarks  
of Canon Inc.  
These symbols indicate that this  
product is not to be disposed of with  
your household waste, according to  
the WEEE Directive (2012/19/EU),  
the Battery Directive (2006/66/EC)  
and/or national legislation  
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Internet Explorer,  
Windows Server, Windows Media and ActiveX are  
trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and other countries.  
• Windows is legally recognized as the Microsoft Windows  
Operating System.  
• This product comes with exFAT, a licensed file system  
technology from Microsoft.  
• QuickTime is a trademark of Apple Inc.  
• microSD, microSDHC and microSDXC Logos are  
trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.  
• Other brands or product names in this guide are  
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective  
companies.  
implementing those Directives.  
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown  
above, in accordance with the Battery Directive, this indicates  
that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb =  
Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a  
concentration above an applicable threshold specified in the  
Battery Directive.  
This product should be handed over to a designated  
collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis  
when you buy a new similar product or to an authorized  
collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic  
equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper  
handling of this type of waste could have a possible impact  
on the environment and human health due to potentially  
hazardous substances that are generally associated with  
EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product  
will contribute to the effective usage of natural resources.  
Warning  
To reduce a risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose  
this product to rain or moisture.  
Notes on the Included Software RM-Lite  
(Disclaimer)  
Flaws or other problems with RM-Lite may result in recording  
failure or destruction or loss of recorded data. Canon shall  
have no liability whatsoever for any loss or damages  
incurred by the user as a result of such problems.  
For more information about the recycling of this product,  
please contact your local city office, waste authority,  
approved scheme or your household waste disposal service  
or visit www.canon-europe.com/weee, or www.canon-  
europe.com/battery.  
Notes on License Agreement for Included  
Software  
This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4  
standard and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant  
video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was  
encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial  
purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T  
patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is  
granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.  
For information on the License Agreement for Included  
Software, refer to the next file in the BundledSoftware  
folder in the Included Setup CD-ROM LICENSE folder.  
Software Type  
File Name  
VB Initial Setting Tool  
Memory Card Unmount Tool  
Backup Tool  
VBTools-E.txt  
Restore Tool  
RM-Lite Network Video Recording  
Software  
RM-Lite-E.txt  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Open Source Software  
The product (camera and included RM-Lite) contains Open  
Source Software modules. For details, see  
“ThirdPartySoftware-E.pdf” (Third-Party Software License) in  
the OpenSourceSoftware folder in the LICENSE folder on  
the Setup CD-ROM. Each module's license conditions are  
also available in the same folder.  
Software under GPL and LGPL  
If you would like to obtain the source code under GPL/  
LGPL, please contact the dealer or sales agent where you  
purchased the product.  
Security Export Control  
This product is subject to security export control.  
Therefore, to export or carry it overseas may require an  
authorization by governmental agencies.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
How to Read This Operation Guide  
User Manuals  
Icons Indicating Particular Camera  
Models  
This camera comes with an “Installation Guide” and  
“Operation Guide” (this manual) included in the Setup  
CD-ROM.  
In the descriptions of functions limited to particular  
models, the model names will appear or the following  
icons will be used to indicate those models.  
Installation Guide (Included)  
Icon  
Camera Model  
This guide provides notes and procedures on camera  
installation. Sections you should reference in this guide  
will be marked “Installation Guide” along with the name  
of the reference items.  
VB-S30D  
VB-S31D  
VB-S800D  
VB-S900F  
Operation Guide (This Document)  
This document explains the initial camera settings,  
Admin Tools settings, viewer operations, troubleshooting  
and the main camera specifications, etc. This document  
is included in the Setup CD-ROM.  
Symbols Indicating Safety Precautions  
In the Setup CD-ROM, the recording software RM-Lite  
(see “Chapter 1 Before Use” > “RM-Lite”) is also included.  
The following user manuals are available.  
This section explains symbols used in this Operation  
Guide. This Operation Guide uses the following symbols  
to indicate important information the user should know in  
order to use the product safely. Be sure to observe these  
items.  
Network Video Recording Software RM-Lite  
Administrator Manual  
This document gives a detailed explanation of how to  
use RM-Lite.  
Symbol  
Meaning  
Failure to follow the instructions  
accompanied by this symbol may result  
Network Video Recording Software RM-Lite  
Viewer Operation Guide  
Warning in death or serious injury. Be sure to  
observe these warnings to ensure  
safety.  
This is the operation guide for RM-Lite Viewer. For more  
details on operating procedures for the viewer, see the  
Administrator Manual.  
Failure to follow the instructions  
accompanied by this symbol may result  
in injury. Be sure to observe these  
Caution  
precautions to ensure safety.  
Failure to follow the instructions  
accompanied by this symbol may result  
in property damage. Be sure to observe  
these precautions.  
How to use this Operation Guide  
Caution  
The assumed reading format of this user manual is on a  
computer screen.  
This symbol indicates other actions or  
information that should be noted.  
Important notes and restrictions are  
provided. Be sure to read this section.  
Important  
Note  
Software Screenshots  
The software screenshots shown in these user manuals  
are illustrative samples only. The screenshots may differ  
from the actual screens displayed.  
Contains operational reference  
information or additional explanations.  
Screenshots used with the explanations are generally  
from a Windows 8 computer connected to the VB-S30D.  
This document describes the case when [1920 x 1080 /  
960 x 540 / 480 x 270] is selected for the video size set. If  
using a different video size set, substitute those sizes  
when reading this manual.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Safety Precautions  
The following items must be observed when using the camera.  
If they are not observed, injury, death and/or property damage may occur. Read the following information carefully and  
observe the instructions without fail.  
Important Warnings  
FCC NOTICE  
Caution  
Network Camera, Model Name: VB-S30D/VB-S31D/  
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO  
NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).  
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER  
SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.  
VB-S800D/VB-S900F  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)  
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)  
this device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
FDA regulation  
This Network Camera has not been evaluated by the  
Food and Drug Administration (FDA) for use as a  
medical device. When incorporated into a system with  
medical applications, FDA regulations may apply.  
Therefore, please consult your legal advisor to  
determine whether FDA regulations apply.  
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to  
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,  
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are  
designed to provide reasonable protection against  
harmful interference in a residential installation.  
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio  
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications.  
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not  
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does  
cause harmful interference to radio or television  
reception, which can be determined by turning the  
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to  
correct the interference by one or more of the following  
measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and  
receiver.  
Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit  
different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV  
technician for help.  
Do not make any changes or modifications to the  
equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual. If  
such changes or modifications should be made, you  
could be required to stop operation of the equipment.  
Canon U.S.A., Inc.  
One Canon Park, Melville, New York 11747, U.S.A.  
Tel No. 1-800-OK-CANON (1-800-652-2666)  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Safety Precautions  
Precautions for Use  
Precautions for Use of Built-In Camera Functions and  
Included Software  
Warning  
If you discover defective conditions such as smoke,  
Caution  
strange sounds, heat or strange odors, immediately  
stop using the camera and contact your nearest  
dealer.  
Do not use the built-in camera functions or included  
software listed below in cases requiring a high level of  
reliability:  
– Intelligent functions  
Continued use of the product may cause fire or electric  
shock.  
– Network video recording software RM-Lite  
Do not disassemble or modify the camera.  
These features do not guarantee high-precision capture  
and cannot support applications beyond their intended  
range of use. Canon will assume no liability for any  
accident or damage resulting from the use of these  
functions.  
Do not spill water or other liquid inside the camera,  
spray the camera with water, or otherwise make it wet.  
Do not insert foreign objects into the camera.  
Do not use flammable sprays near the camera.  
Do not leave LAN cables connected when the camera  
is not in use for long periods.  
Notes on Cleaning  
Warning  
Do not damage the connecting cable.  
Do not use alcohol, thinner, benzine or any other  
flammable solvent.  
This may cause fire or electric shock.  
Do not use with medical devices or other life-support  
systems.  
This may cause fire or electric shock.  
Depending on the computer and network environment,  
high-precision video transmission cannot be guaranteed  
due to video delay or loss.  
Canon will assume no liability for any accident or  
damage resulting from use of the camera in the  
aforementioned devices or systems.  
Caution  
Do not capture the sun, halogen lamps, and other very  
bright light sources or subjects.  
Do not expose the camera to strong impact or  
vibration.  
Do not forcibly turn the rotating parts of  
the camera by hand.  
This may cause malfunction.  
This installation should be made by a qualified service  
person and should conform to all local codes.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance  
Turn off the power before cleaning the camera.  
Cleaning of Exterior  
1 Dampen a soft cloth with water or diluted neutral  
detergent and wipe away the grime gently.  
2 Wipe with a dry cloth.  
Cleaning of Lens  
Use a commercial lens cleaner to remove grime on the  
lens surface.  
Auto focus may not work properly if the lens  
surface is dusty or dirty.  
• Be aware that scratches on the lens surface may result  
in poor video capture.  
Cleaning the Top Cover  
Grime on the top cover will reduce video quality, so  
periodic cleaning is required.  
If the surface of the top cover cannot be cleaned well,  
remove it following the steps below to clean it more  
thoroughly.  
1 Remove the top cover.  
See steps in “Installing the Camera” in the “Installation  
Guide” included with the camera to remove the top  
cover.  
2 Dampen a soft cloth with water or diluted neutral  
detergent and wipe away the grime gently.  
3 Wipe with a dry cloth.  
4 Reattach the top cover to its original position.  
Periodically check the brackets and screws for rust and  
loosening to prevent injuries and equipment damage due  
to falling items.  
For inspections, please contact the dealer where you  
purchased the product.  
Disposing of the Camera  
Dispose of the camera in accordance with local laws and  
regulations.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Table of Contents  
Notes on Use with Internet Explorer 9 or Greater and Windows Server 2008/  
Windows Server 2012.......................................................................................................19  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes on Use with Internet Explorer 9 or Greater and Windows Server 2008/  
Windows Server 2012.......................................................................................................27  
[Event] Setting Video Record, Volume Detection, External Device Output/  
Input and Timer.................................................................................................... 56  
[Maintenance] Viewing Current Settings, Event Logs and  
Performing Maintenance...................................................................................... 73  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
1
Before Use  
Camera Features  
Software Information  
Operating Environment and Precautions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Features  
This camera integrates both camera and server functions into a compact network camera.  
Compact and Lightweight  
Low Illumination Video Capture  
Equipped with AF Zoom Lens  
Pan/Tilt Functions  
Small and light while maintaining full HD video quality, and easy to install.  
The camera can capture color video even with low subject illumination.  
The camera is equipped with a 3.5x optical (4x digital) zoom lens with auto focus.  
You can operate camera angle controls remotely.  
Smart Shade Control Auto Mode  
The camera analyzes the video brightness, and automatically adjusts the exposure  
compensation and dark space compensation levels.  
3 Video Size Categories  
Video Distribution  
Video sizes can be selected from 1080p, 720p, and 4:3 categories.  
Supports two video compression methods (JPEG/H.264). Multi-stream distribution is also  
supported using different video sizes belonging to the same category.  
Custom Settings  
Preset camera settings can be applied (or loaded) when switching between day/night  
mode or by a timer.  
Supports microSD/microSDHC/  
microSDXC memory cards*  
You can record video and logs when uploading fails, and record video as JPEG or H.264  
files to memory cards (manual, timer, and event recording are supported). Recorded Video  
Utility in Admin Tools allows you to search and play back recorded video.  
The camera boasts a variety of intelligent functions that offer the wide array of detection options.  
Moving object detection, abandoned object detection, removed object detection,  
tempering detection, passing detection, volume detection.  
Intelligent Functions  
By using the supplied network video recording software, RM-Lite, you can record and  
display live video from up to four cameras.  
Small-Scale Video Monitoring via RM-Lite  
Software (Supplied)  
* In this manual, the memory card that can be used with the camera is referred to as “memory card”.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1
Camera Software  
RM-Lite (p. 17)  
Installed Software  
This software displays and records video from up to four  
cameras in real time.  
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer  
Proxy Authentication Admin Viewer/Admin  
There are two types of Viewer: the VB Viewer, which can  
be used by Guest Users, and the Admin Viewer for  
Administrators.  
The VB Viewer allows users to configure basic camera  
controls and display video.  
Tools  
This software lets you use Admin Viewer/Admin Tools via  
a proxy server with proxy authentication. It is saved in the  
ProxyAuthSupport folder on the Setup CD-ROM.  
The Admin Viewer lets you monitor all camera controls  
and events.  
Backup and Restore Tools  
The Backup and Restore tools back up camera setting  
information to the computer. Information from multiple  
cameras can be saved at the same time.  
The tools can also restore information saved on the  
computer to the camera.  
Admin Tools (See Chapter 5 “Admin Tools”)  
The following tools for configuring camera settings and  
performing management functions are available:  
Privacy Mask Setting Tool  
Panorama Creation Tool  
View Restriction Setting Tool  
Preset Setting Tool  
Memory Card Unmount Tool  
This software allows you to mount/unmount memory cards  
inserted in specified cameras, and acquire information  
from memory cards.  
Intelligent Function Setting Tool  
Log Viewer  
Recorded Video Utility  
Additional License (Sold Separately)  
You can purchase additional licenses as necessary.  
Included Software  
The included Setup CD-ROM contains the following  
software. Install the software on a computer to use it.  
Canon H.264 Additional User License AUL-  
VB (Sold Separately)  
Additional license added for viewing H.264 video with  
multiple computers via Admin Viewer or Recorded Video  
Utility.  
VB Initial Setting Tool  
This tool performs initial settings for the camera.  
Network Video Recording Software (Sold  
Separately)  
Admin Tools Certificate  
This electronic certificate is required to use the Admin  
Viewer and Admin Tools.  
RM-64/RM-25/RM-9  
This software allows network cameras to be used for  
multipoint surveillance, and for recording and playing  
back videos from the camera. The number of cameras  
.NET Framework 3.5 SP1/.NET Framework  
4.5  
This execution environment is required to use the software  
included in the camera.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
that can be registered with RM-64/RM-25/RM-9 varies: 64,  
25, or 9 cameras can be registered.  
RM-V  
This additional license lets you install RM-64/RM-25/RM-9  
Viewer on multiple computers. Purchase the license to be  
able to view video captured by the camera from multiple  
sites and for other similar purposes.  
RM-Lite-V  
This additional license lets you install the RM-Lite Viewer  
on multiple computers. Purchase the license to be able to  
view video captured by the camera from multiple sites  
and for other similar purposes.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Camera Software  
1
RM-Lite (See the “Administrator Manual”)  
The installer (RMLiteInstall.exe) can be found in the Applications folder on the Setup CD-ROM.  
RM-Lite Software Configuration  
Type  
Overview  
License  
RM-Lite Storage Server  
Up to four cameras can be registered to record video.  
1 license  
Plays recorded video saved in the storage server and displays live  
video (JPEG/H.264) captured by the camera.  
RM-Lite Viewer  
1 license  
Up to four cameras can be registered for the viewer.  
RM-Lite Viewer  
RM-Lite Storage Server  
Network  
Flow of Video from the Camera  
Flow of Recorded Video  
VB-S30D, VB-S31D, VB-S800D, VB-S900F, VB-H41, VB-H610VE, VB-H610D, VB-H710F, VB-  
M40, VB-M600VE, VB-M600D, VB-M700F, VB-C60, VB-C500VD/VB-C500D, VB-C300,  
VB-C50i/VB-C50iR, VB-C50FSi/VB-C50Fi  
Supported cameras  
Important  
• To add the RM-Lite Viewer, purchase RM-Lite-V (sold separately).  
• The VB-S30D/VB-S31D/VB-S800D/VB-S900F/VB-H41/VB-H610VE/VB-H610D/VB-H710F/VB-M40/VB-M600VE/VB-M600D/VB-M700F  
cannot be used with Network Video Recording Software older than RM-Lite. Users of VK-64/VK-16 must switch to RM-Lite.  
For details, visit our website.  
Note  
For details on the usage and functions of RM-Lite, see the “Administrator Manual”.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Operating Environment  
For the latest information on this product (firmware and included software, user manuals, operating environment, etc.),  
please refer to the Canon Web Site.  
VB Initial Setting Tool, Admin Viewer/VB Viewer, Admin Tools  
CPU  
Intel Core i7-2600 or higher  
Windows Vista Ultimate/Business/Enterprise/Home Premium SP2 32/64-bit  
Windows 7 Ultimate/Professional/Enterprise/Home Premium SP1 32/64-bit  
4
Windows 8/Windows 8 Pro/Windows 8 Enterprise 32/64-bit *  
4
Windows 8.1/Windows 8.1 Pro/Windows 8.1 Enterprise 32/64-bit *  
1
Operating Systems*  
Windows Server 2008 Standard SP2 32/64-bit  
Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard SP1 64-bit  
4
Windows Server 2012 Standard 64-bit *  
4
Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard 64-bit *  
Internet Explorer 8/9 32-bit  
Internet Explorer 10/11  
2
Web Browser*  
Memory  
2 GB or more  
Viewer Display  
1920 x 1080 or higher  
.NET Framework 3.5 SP1 (When using Internet Explorer 8/9)  
– Must be installed on Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 systems  
3
Software*  
.NET Framework 4.5 (When using Internet Explorer 10/11)  
– Must be installed on Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 systems  
When using the camera's audio feature, the computer audio support feature is  
required.  
Audio  
*1 Set the Control Panel’s font size (DPI) for Admin Tools and Admin Viewer to 100% or 125%.  
*2 The browser must support JavaScript, XAML browser applications, and IFRAME (HTML tag).  
The VB Viewer requires cookies.  
*3 Installation is unnecessary if only VB Viewer will be used. .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 and 4.5 are provided on the included  
setup CD-ROM, and the appropriate installer is selected automatically depending on the version of Internet Explorer.  
*4 The included software or the software installed on the camera cannot be started from the Start screen added to  
Windows 8 and later.  
RM-Lite  
For operating environment details, refer to “Operating Environment” in the “Administrator Manual”.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
1
Notes on Operating Environment  
Select [VB Initial Setting Tool], and then click [Add].  
Notes on Use When the [Windows  
Firewall] Function is Enabled  
3
When the VB Initial Setting Tool is started, the [Windows  
Security Alert] dialog box may appear.  
If the [Windows Security Alert] dialog box appears, click  
[Unblock].  
Once this button is clicked, the warning dialog box will no  
longer appear.  
If the [Windows Security Alert] dialog box does not appear,  
the Windows firewall warning function may be disabled.  
Follow the procedure below to add the [VB Initial Setting  
Tool] as a Windows Firewall exception.  
Click [Windows Firewall] in [Control Panel] > [System  
and Security].  
1
Notes on Use with Internet Explorer 9 or  
Greater and Windows Server 2008/  
Windows Server 2012  
Registering the Top Page of the Camera as a  
Trusted Site  
In Internet Explorer 9 or greater and Windows Server 2008/  
Windows Server 2012, the security level for Internet sites and  
intranet sites on Internet Explorer is set to [High] by default.  
Thus, when accessing the Admin Viewer/VB Viewer, the  
camera's Setting Page or the Admin Tools, a content block  
dialog box appears and the page fails to display correctly.  
To correct this problem, follow the procedure below to  
register the top page as a trusted site.  
Click [Allow an app or feature through Windows  
Firewall] > [Change settings] > [Allow another app].  
2
Access the Admin Viewer/VB Viewer and the Setting  
Page from the top page of the camera with Internet  
Explorer.  
1
The following dialog box appears.  
Click [Add].  
2
The [Trusted sites] dialog box appears.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
If selected, clear the [Require server verification (https:) for  
all sites in this zone] checkbox.  
Notes on Use with Windows Server 2008/  
Windows Server 2012  
3
4
Registering “about:internet” and the  
Camera Host Name  
Admin Viewer and Admin Tools will not start when IE ESC  
(Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration) is  
enabled in Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2012.  
Before using the tools, register “about:internet” and the  
host name for the connected camera in the Internet  
Explorer “local intranet” and “trusted sites” lists.  
Enter the IP address of the camera under [Add this  
Web site to the zone], and then click [Add].  
Note that even when the content block dialog box does  
not appear, JavaScript is sometimes disabled under the  
standard security settings, which may limit operations on  
the setting page and the Admin Viewer/VB Viewer.  
Register the page as a trusted site as this automatically  
enables JavaScript settings.  
If the content block dialog box does not appear, follow the  
procedure below to display the [Trusted Sites] dialog box.  
Click [Tools] > [Internet Options] from the Internet  
Explorer menu to display the [Internet Options] dialog  
box.  
1
Important  
When “about:internet” is registered, the security level in  
Windows 7 is the same as when using Internet Explorer. After  
using the Admin Viewer/Admin Tools, it is recommended that  
you remove “about:internet” and the camera name as  
necessary and restore the original security level.  
Click the [Security] tab.  
2
Web Browser Security Settings When Using  
SSL Connection  
When an SSL connection to the camera is made from a  
web browser (Internet Explorer 9/10/11) in Windows  
Server 2008/Windows Server 2012, the following  
operations may display the content block dialog box and  
prevent further operation.  
• Startup of Admin Tools or Admin Viewer  
• Audio reception from VB Viewer  
This happens when Internet Explorer Enhanced Security  
Configuration (IE ESC) is enabled in Internet Explorer 9/  
10/11. Use the procedures below to change this setting.  
Click and select [Trusted sites], and then click [Sites].  
3
The [Trusted sites] dialog box appears.  
Click [Internet Options] in the [Tools] menu in Internet  
1
This completes the trusted site registration process.  
Explorer 9/10/11 and click the [Advanced] tab.  
Clear the [Do not save encrypted pages to disk]  
checkbox in [Security].  
2
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notes on Operating Environment  
1
The [Sound] dialog box appears.  
4
Important  
Click the [Playback] tab to confirm that an audio device  
has been installed. (If no audio device is installed, refer  
to your computer manual.)  
Note that when IE Enhanced Security Configuration is turned  
back on, the [Do not save encrypted pages to disk] checkbox  
also becomes enabled.  
Notes on Use with Windows Vista/  
Windows 7/Windows 8/Windows Server  
2012  
Enabling the Sound Function to Use Audio  
In Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2012, the sound  
function is disabled by default.  
To receive audio with the Viewer, follow the steps below to  
enable the sound function.  
The following restrictions apply.  
Open [Control Panel] and click [Hardware].  
RM-Lite  
1
For important information on the RM-Lite operating  
environment, see the “Administrator Manual”.  
Notes for Windows 8/Windows Server  
2012  
Each software application, including Admin Viewer and  
Admin Tools, cannot be started from the Start screen.  
Note  
If [Control Panel] is in the classic view, double-click [Sound].  
Click [Sound].  
2
When the [Audio Service Not Running] message  
appears, click [Yes].  
3
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
2
Initial Settings  
Preparing the Camera for Use  
Initial Setting Tool Installation  
Initial Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Preparing the Camera for Use  
Performing Initial Settings for the Camera  
Before installing the camera, read this chapter and use the VB Initial Setting Tool to  
configure the IP address.  
Checking Video  
When initial settings are complete, access the camera via a web browser and check the  
video using the VB Viewer.  
Installing the Camera  
Install the camera to suit the operating environment it will be used in.  
“Installation Guide”  
Configuring the Camera from the Setting Page  
The setting page lets you configure basic camera settings, network operations, user  
registration, and access restrictions.  
Using Admin Tools  
Admin Tools let you set viewing restrictions, make preset settings, and make settings for  
using intelligent functions. In addition, you can review logs to check on the camera's  
operation status.  
Using Admin Viewer/VB Viewer  
The camera's built-in Admin Viewer/VB Viewer features an Admin Viewer for  
administrators and a VB Viewer for guest users. Use the VB viewer to check distribution to  
guest users and Admin Viewer to check all operations.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Preparing the Camera for Use  
2
Operating  
If an error message appears or the camera fails to operate correctly, see the error  
message and log message information in “Chapter 7 Appendix”.  
Important  
Before starting operations, make sure that the setting page and Admin Tools settings are functioning correctly.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Necessary Software  
Install the following software to perform initial settings for the camera.  
• VB Initial Setting Tool: Software required for performing initial camera settings  
• Admin Tools Certificate: An electronic certificate that is required for using Admin Viewer and Admin Tools  
• .NET Framework 3.5 SP1/.NET Framework 4.5: The execution environment required for network camera software (not  
required if already installed on the computer)  
You can perform either an Easy Installation or a Custom Installation of the software.  
Note  
• All computer users will be able to use Admin Viewer and Admin Tools if the Admin Tools certificate was installed by the installer.  
• Select [Custom Installation] and install only the “Admin Tools Certificate” if you intend to use the Admin Viewer and Admin Tools on a  
computer other than the one where the VB Initial Setting Tool is installed.  
[Custom Installation]: The user can select and install  
desired software.  
Insert the Setup CD-ROM included in the camera in  
the disc drive on the computer.  
1
2
3
After confirming that all other applications have been  
closed, click the [Start] menu > [My Computer].  
Double-click the CD-ROM icon > [Applications] folder  
> [VBToolsInstall.exe].  
After selecting [Easy Installation], click [Next] and after  
selecting [Custom Installation], select the checkboxes  
of the software you want to install and click [Next].  
5
6
The installation screen appears.  
The User License Agreement screen appears.  
Select the installation method.  
4
Read through the user license agreement and click  
[Yes] if you accept it.  
[Easy Installation]: VB Initial Setting Tool and Admin  
Tools certificate are installed.  
Installation starts.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Installing the Necessary Software  
When the installation complete screen appears, click  
[Exit] or [Reboot].  
If selected, clear the [Require server verification (https:) for  
all sites in this zone] checkbox.  
7
3
4
2
The VB Initial Setting Tool icon appears on the  
desktop.  
Enter the IP address of the camera under [Add this  
Web site to the zone], and then click [Add].  
Note that even when the content block dialog box does  
not appear, JavaScript is sometimes disabled under the  
standard security settings, which may limit operations on  
the setting page and the Admin Viewer/VB Viewer.  
Register the page as a trusted site as this automatically  
enables JavaScript settings.  
Notes on Use with Internet Explorer 9 or  
Greater and Windows Server 2008/  
Windows Server 2012  
If the content block dialog box does not appear, follow the  
procedure below to display the [Trusted Sites] dialog box.  
Registering the Top Page of the Camera as a  
Trusted Site  
Click [Tools] > [Internet Options] from the Internet  
Explorer menu to display the [Internet Options] dialog  
box.  
1
In Internet Explorer 9 or greater and Windows Server 2008/  
Windows Server 2012, the security level for Internet sites and  
intranet sites on Internet Explorer is set to [High] by default.  
Thus, when accessing the Admin Viewer/VB Viewer, the  
camera's Setting Page or the Admin Tools, a content block  
dialog box appears and the page fails to display correctly.  
To correct this problem, follow the procedure below to  
register the top page as a trusted site.  
Click the [Security] tab.  
2
Access the Admin Viewer/VB Viewer and the Setting  
Page from the top page of the camera with Internet  
Explorer.  
1
The following dialog box appears.  
Click and select [Trusted sites], and then click [Sites].  
3
The [Trusted sites] dialog box appears.  
This completes the trusted site registration process.  
Click [Add].  
2
The [Trusted sites] dialog box appears.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Performing Initial Settings for the Camera  
Use the VB Initial Setting Tool to configure the camera  
network.  
Enter the user name “root” and factory default setting  
password “camera”, and then the appropriate IP  
address and subnet mask.  
4
Connect the camera and computer to the network and  
turn on the camera (“Installation Guide” > “Connecting  
the Camera”).  
1
To use a setting other than the default gateway  
setting, clear the [Enter a default gateway address]  
checkbox.  
After settings are complete, click [OK].  
Launch the VB Initial Setting Tool.  
2
To launch the VB Initial Setting Tool, double-click the  
[VB Initial Setting Tool] icon on the desktop.  
Setup progress is shown in the window.  
The VB Initial Setting Tool will automatically detect the  
camera connected to the network and display the  
camera's MAC address, IP address and model name.  
The factory setting IP address is set to 192.168.100.1.  
The MAC address can be found on the label on the  
camera (“Installation Guide” > “Part Names”).  
Note  
• To ensure security, be sure to change the administrator  
password (p. 32).  
• Contact your System Administrator for the appropriate IP  
address, subnet mask and gateway address.  
Click [OK].  
Important  
5
• Twenty minutes after the camera is turned on, it will stop  
issuing IP address assignments requests and VB Initial  
Setting Tool detection will be disabled. In such cases, turn  
the camera off and on again.  
• There may be cautionary information, depending on your  
operating environment. Read “Notes on Operating  
Environment” (p. 19) before performing initial settings.  
Important  
• The VB Initial Setting Tool cannot be used with cameras that  
are behind a router.  
To obtain an IP address from a DHCP server or set IPv6, first  
use the VB Initial Setting Tool to temporarily configure an IPv4  
static address that can communicate with the computer. Then,  
in [Network] on the setting page, change [IPv4 Address Setting  
Method] to [Auto (DHCP)] in the [IPv4] area (p. 37), or  
configure an IPv6 address.  
Select a MAC address, and then click [Initial Setting].  
3
Click to select  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Checking the Camera Video  
2
Once initial settings are complete, check the video on the  
camera with the VB Viewer. When doing so, set the  
computer network settings to comply with the IP address  
and subnet mask settings on the camera.  
Click to select the camera's MAC address which will be  
checked, and then click [Settings].  
1
Click to select  
This will launch the web browser and display the top  
page of the camera. Click [VB Viewer].  
2
The viewer launches and displays the camera video.  
If the top page of the camera does not appear or the  
VB Viewer does not launch, see “Troubleshooting”  
Important  
• The camera video cannot be checked until the network  
settings in the computer are configured for the IP address  
and subnet that are set in the camera.  
• Do not change the camera HTTP port from 80 if you want to  
open the setting page by clicking [Settings]. See “HTTP  
Server” (p. 55) for more information on HTTP port settings.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
3
Top Page of the Camera  
Accessing the Setting Page, Admin Tools and Viewer  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Accessing the Top Page of the Camera  
Accessing the Top Page of the Camera  
User Authentication  
From the top page of the camera, you can navigate to the  
Setting Menu to configure various camera settings, launch  
Admin Tools, and display the viewer to view video.  
User authentication is required to access [Setting Page],  
[Admin Tools] and [Admin Viewer].  
Launch the web browser.  
1
Enter the IP address you specified in the Initial Setting  
Tool.  
2
Admin Tools/Admin  
Viewer authentication  
window  
Setting Page authentication  
window  
Important  
This “Operation Guide” explains relevant operations using the  
IP address 192.168.100.1 (factory default setting). You need to  
enter the actual IP address set for the camera when following  
instructions.  
The factory default setting user name and password are:  
User name: root Password: camera  
(The user name “root” is the administrator account for the  
camera. Connection to [Setting Page] and [Admin Tools]  
is limited to the user name “root”.)  
The top page of the camera appears.  
Important  
(1)  
• To ensure system security, be sure to change the  
administrator password. Do not forget the new password.  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
• If the Administrator and an authorized user share the VB  
Viewer on the same computer, it is strongly recommended  
that the [Remember my credentials] checkbox be cleared.  
• If the wrong user name or password is entered, you cannot  
connect to the camera. Connect to the camera by entering  
the correct user name and password.  
• Press the reset switch to restore factory default settings if you  
have forgotten the administrator password (p. 159). Note,  
however, that this will reset all camera settings to factory  
default settings except for time and date.  
(1) Language Button  
Click to switch the display language.  
The top page language switches to the selected  
language.  
• The Admin Tools and the Admin Viewer cannot be used if an  
IPv6 address is specified. Only host names are supported for  
IPv6 connections.  
(2) Setting Page (Setting Menu) Link  
Click to make detailed settings. See “Chapter 4  
(3) Admin Tools Link  
Click to use the Admin Tools. See “Chapter 5 Admin  
(4) Admin Viewer Link  
Click to access the Admin Viewer. See “Chapter 6  
(5) VB Viewer Link  
Click to access the VB Viewer. See “Chapter 6 Admin  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter  
4
Setting Page  
Administrator Password and Network Detailed Settings  
Camera Date and Time Settings  
Camera Name and Initial Camera Settings Related Settings  
Video Size and Quality Settings  
Upload and E-mail Notification Settings  
Video Server, Audio Server and HTTP Server Settings  
Settings Related to Events  
User Registration/Authorities and Access Restriction Settings  
IPsec Settings  
HTTP Communication Encryption (SSL/TLS) Settings  
802.1X Authentication  
Memory Card Operations and Displaying Information  
Settings for Items Requiring Rebooting  
Maintenance (Displaying Log and Setting Information/Rebooting/Factory  
Default Settings)  
Camera Angle  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Setting Menu  
From the Setting Menu, you can navigate to each setting page to set various items regarding the camera.  
Information describing what can be set from each setting page is listed as follows. See each setting page for details.  
Setting Menu  
Network  
IPsec  
IPsec settings (p. 62)  
Administrator password, LAN, IPv4, IPv6, DNS and  
SNMP Settings (p. 37)  
SSL/TLS  
Date and Time  
Camera date and time, time zone and daylight saving  
time settings (p. 40)  
Certificate creation, administrative settings and  
encrypted communication settings (p. 65)  
802.1X  
Camera  
802.1X authentication settings and authentication  
status display (p. 67)  
Camera name, initial camera settings, camera control,  
day/night, installation conditions, camera position  
control, external input device name and external output  
device name settings (p. 42)  
Memory Card  
Memory card operations and information display  
Video  
Reboot Item  
Video quality, video size, and frame rate settings for the  
video size set, JPEG and H.264, as well as on-screen  
display settings (p. 46)  
Setting items that require the camera to be rebooted  
(Reboot Item) (p. 72)  
Maintenance  
RTP  
Device information, display and execution (displaying  
logs, current settings, rebooting and restoring initial  
settings) (p. 73)  
RTP Server, Audio Multicast and RTP Streaming  
settings (p. 49)  
Upload  
Camera Angle  
Digital zoom settings (p. 74)  
General upload and HTTP and FTP upload settings  
and e-mail notification settings (p. 51)  
User Page  
Server  
Link to web page customized by the user (For details,  
contact your nearest Canon Customer Service Center.)  
Video server, audio server and HTTP server settings  
(p. 54)  
Event  
Important  
Video record settings, volume detection, external  
device output, external device input and timer (p. 56)  
Notes on Use with Internet Explorer 8/9/10/11  
If the pop-up is blocked and an information bar appears when  
attempting to access [View Logs] or [View Current Settings] on  
the maintenance page, enable Pop-up by following the procedure  
explained in the information bar.  
Access Control  
Authorized user account, user authorities, host access  
restriction settings (p. 60)  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Accessing the Setting Menu  
The various settings of the camera are configured by accessing the camera in the web browser. First, access the top page  
of the camera (p. 32).  
For details on entering the user name and password, see p. 32.  
4
Setting Menu  
Items Common to All Setting Pages  
(1)  
(2)  
Applying New Settings  
When a setting is changed on any setting page, [Apply]  
shown on the top right and bottom right of the setting  
page turns from grayed-out to blue.  
(3)  
Click [Apply] to make the new setting effective.  
Click [Clear] to restore the previous setting.  
Setting Changes Requiring Rebooting  
(1) [Admin Viewer]  
Items that require the camera to be rebooted in order to  
change settings are flagged with an orange mark.  
Clicking this button opens Admin Viewer.  
(2) [Back to top]  
Clicking this button navigates to the top page.  
(3) Setting Menu  
When any item accompanied by an orange mark is  
changed, the [Apply] shown at the top right and bottom  
right of each setting page changes to [Apply and reboot].  
Clicking these navigates to each setting page.  
Important  
To ensure security, exit the web browser after completing  
settings on the Setting page and after using Admin Viewer/  
Admin Tools.  
Click [Apply and reboot] to confirm the new setting. The  
new setting will be reflected and the camera will be  
rebooted.  
Click [Clear] to restore the previous setting.  
Important  
Setting changes will be lost if you navigate to another setting  
page without clicking [Apply] or [Apply and reboot]. Be sure to  
click [Apply] or [Apply and reboot] to make the new settings  
effective.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Returning to the Setting Menu  
Click [Settings menu] at the top right of each setting page  
to return to the Setting Menu.  
Important  
• Do not open multiple setting pages at one time and try to  
change the settings of a single camera.  
• Do not use the [Back] or [Forward] buttons in the web  
browser to navigate between setting pages. The changed  
settings may return to the original settings or unwanted  
setting changes may be applied.  
Note  
Click on  
[Help] at the beginning of any item to display a  
detailed explanation of that setting item.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[Network]  
Setting Administrator Password, LAN, IP Address, DNS, etc  
LAN  
The following can be set here.  
4
Administrator Password  
Set the administrator password.  
LAN  
(1) [LAN Interface]  
Set the IP address and other items needed to  
establish a LAN connection.  
Select [Auto], [Full Duplex] or [Half Duplex]. Normally  
[Auto] is used.  
IPv4  
Set IPv4 address.  
(2) [Maximum Packet Size]  
Enter the maximum transmission unit. Normally there  
is no need to change the default setting of 1500.  
IPv6  
Set IPv6 address.  
DNS  
Important  
Set the name server address, host name and  
DDNS registration.  
• The camera may become inaccessible from the active web  
browser if [LAN Interface] or [Maximum Packet Size] settings  
are changed. Check beforehand the precautions in  
SNMP  
Configure the necessary settings to use SNMP.  
• Set [Maximum Packet Size] to 1280 or greater if using IPv6.  
Administrator Password  
Note  
When using optical fiber or ADSL, setting the maximum packet  
size to a slightly lower value may increase sending efficiency.  
(1) [Password]  
IPv4  
Set the administrator password. Up to eight (single-  
byte) ASCII characters (space or printable  
characters) can be used. The factory default setting is  
“camera”. If the Admin Viewer, Admin Tools, etc., are  
connected, terminate the connection before changing  
the password.  
(2) [Confirm Password]  
(1) [IPv4 Address Setting Method]  
Enter the same password as above for confirmation.  
Select [Manual] or [Auto (DHCP)] in the address  
setting method. If [Manual] is selected, directly enter  
the values according to the environment in which the  
camera is used. If [Auto (DHCP)] is selected,the value  
automatically acquired from the DHCP server will be  
entered in [IPv4 Address],[Subnet Mask] and [IPv4  
Default Gateway Address].  
Important  
• To ensure system security, be sure to change the  
administrator password. Do not forget the new password.  
• Press the reset switch to restore factory default settings if you  
have forgotten the administrator password (p. 159). Note,  
however, that this will reset all camera settings to factory  
default settings except for date and time.  
(2) [IPv4 Address]  
If [Manual] is specified in (1), enter a fixed IP address.  
(3) [Subnet Mask]  
If [Manual] is specified in (1), enter the designated  
subnet mask values for each network.  
(4) [IPv4 Default Gateway Address]  
Enter an appropriate value if [Manual] is specified in  
(1). Be sure to set when connecting the camera to a  
different subnet from that of the viewer.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
(5) [AutoIP]  
Set AutoIP to [Disable] or [Enable].  
(6) [IPv6 Default Gateway Address]  
Enter a default gateway address if [Disable] is  
specified in (2). Be sure to set when connecting the  
camera to a different subnet from that of the viewer.  
(6) [IPv4 Address (AutoIP)]  
When [Enable] is selected in (5), an automatically set  
IP address is displayed.  
(7) [IPv6 Address (Auto)]  
If [Enable] is specified in (1) and [Enable] is specified  
in (2) and (3), then the automatically acquired address  
will be shown.  
Important  
• Contact your System Administrator for the [IPv4 Address],  
[Subnet Mask] and [IPv4 Default Gateway Address].  
Important  
• The camera's IP address cannot be set to an IP address that  
starts with 127., such as 127.0.0.1.  
• Contact your System Administrator for the [IPv6 Address  
(Manual)], [Prefix Length] and [IPv6 Default Gateway  
Address].  
• If any of the [IPv4 Address], [Subnet Mask] or [IPv4 Default  
Gateway Address] settings are wrong, network access may  
be disabled. In this case, see “Performing Initial Settings for  
the Camera” (p. 28) and use VB Initial Setting Tool to set the  
address again.  
• The camera may become inaccessible from the active web  
browser if settings are changed in [IPv6], [IPv6 Address  
(Manual)], [Prefix Length] or [IPv6 Default Gateway Address].  
Check beforehand the precautions in “Important” in “[Reboot  
• The camera may become inaccessible from the active web  
browser if settings are changed in [IPv4 Address], [Subnet  
Mask] or [IPv4 Default Gateway Address]. Check beforehand  
the precautions in “Important” in “[Reboot Item] Setting Items  
Note  
In an environment where IPv6 cannot be used, if IPv6 is set to  
[Enable] and auto is set to [Enable], then the [IPv6 Address  
(Auto)] field will display the link-local address only.  
• If [Auto (DHCP)] is selected as the IPv4 address setting  
mode, the IPv4 address may not be assigned correctly in  
certain environments, such as when a router is present  
between the DHCP server and the camera. In this case,  
assign a fixed IPv4 address from the [Manual] settings.  
DNS  
IPv6  
(1) [Name Server Address 1], [Name Server Address 2]  
Enter the name server address you want to register.  
To register only one address, keep the [Name Server  
Address 2] field blank.  
(1) [IPv6]  
Set IPv6 use to [Disable] or [Enable].  
(2) [Auto (RA)]  
(2) [Auto-Setting of Name Server Address]  
Select the method for setting the name server address  
automatically using DHCP. Select [Use DHCP] to use  
a name server address obtained automatically from  
the DHCP server. Select [Use DHCPv6] to use a name  
server address obtained automatically from the  
DHCPv6 server. Select [Use DHCP/DHCPv6] to use a  
name server address obtained automatically from the  
DHCP server or DHCPv6 server. Select [Disable] if not  
using DHCP.  
Select [Enable] to set an address automatically using  
RA (Router Advertisement, network information  
automatically transmitted from a router), or select  
[Disable] not to set an address automatically.  
(3) [Auto (DHCPv6)]  
Select [Enable] to use DHCPv6 to set an address  
automatically or [Disable] not to set an address  
automatically.  
(4) [IPv6 Address (Manual)]  
To set [Use DHCP], select [Auto (DHCP)] in [IPv4  
Address Setting Method].  
Enter a fixed IPv6 address.  
(5) [Prefix Length]  
To set [Use DHCPv6], select [Enable] in [IPv6], then  
select [Enable] in [Auto (DHCPv6)].  
Enter a prefix length from 16 to 128 if [Disable] is  
specified in (2).  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
[Network] Setting Administrator Password, LAN, IP Address, DNS, etc  
(3) [Name Server Address (DHCP)]  
(1) [SNMP]  
Select [Use DHCP] or [Use DHCP/DHCPv6] in [Auto-  
Setting of Name Server Address] to display the name  
server address acquired from the DHCP server.  
Set SNMP use to [Disable] or [Enable]. Camera  
information can be referenced by the SNMP Manager  
if [Enable] is specified.  
(4) [Name Server Address (DHCPv6)]  
Select [Use DHCPv6] or [Use DHCP/DHCPv6] in  
[Auto-Setting of Name Server Address] to display the  
name server address acquired from the DHCPv6  
server.  
(2) [Community Name]  
Set a community name for SNMP. It is recommended  
that you change the community name to ensure  
system security.  
4
(3) [Administrator Contact Information]  
(5) [Host Name]  
Set contact information (e-mail address, etc.) for the  
Administrator of the camera. Setting information can  
be referenced by the SNMP manager.  
You can register the host name of the camera in the  
name server.  
Characters A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, “-” (hyphen), “_”  
(underscore) and “.” (period) may be used up to 63  
(single-byte) characters in length.  
(4) [Administration Function Name]  
Set the camera name used for administration. Setting  
information can be referenced by the SNMP manager.  
(6) [Host Name Registration with DDNS]  
Select [Enable] to register the entered name server  
address and host name of the camera.  
If left blank, the following will be used by default:  
VB-S30D  
VB-S31D  
VB-S800D  
VB-S900F  
(7) [Search Domain]  
Specify the host name, without specifying a domain  
name, for a server, such as the upload server, to  
search domains in the form “host name + domain  
name”, where the domain names are specified in the  
server domain list. Enter a domain name and click  
[Add] to add the domain name to the search domain  
list.  
(5) [Installation Location]  
Set information regarding the installation location of  
this camera. Setting information can be referenced by  
the SNMP manager.  
Note  
• The information set in the camera is read-only from the SNMP  
manager.  
(8) [Search Domain List]  
A list of domain names added using [Search Domain]  
appears. The function queries DNS server for each  
domain name starting from the top of the list.  
Use the ▲▼ buttons on the right to change the order  
of the domain names.  
• Use the SNMP Manager that supports SNMP MIB2 (supporting  
RFC1213).  
• Supports SNMP protocol versions v1 and v2c (v3  
unsupported).  
To delete a domain name, select one from the list and  
then click [Delete].  
Important  
Do not use “_” (underscore) in [Host Name] and [Search  
Domain] in Internet Explorer 8/9/10/11.  
Note  
• Use [Host Name Registration with DDNS] if the camera IP  
Address Setting Method is [Auto (DHCP)] (p. 37). DNS server  
registration settings must be set in advance. Contact your  
System Administrator for the DNS server settings.  
• If the name server address 1 is unavailable, the name server  
address 2 will be accessed. However, the name server  
address 2 must be set in advance.  
SNMP  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
[Date and Time] Setting Date and Time  
[Use DHCP]  
The following can be set here.  
The camera time is synchronized with the time of the  
NTP server at the address acquired from the DHCP  
server. In order to set [Use DHCP], you must  
change [Network] > [IPv4 Address Setting Method]  
to [Auto (DHCP)] (p. 37).  
Current Date and Time  
The date and time set in the camera is shown.  
Setting  
Select the date and time setting method, time  
zone and daylight saving time for the camera.  
Current Date and Time  
[Use DHCPv6]  
The camera time is synchronized with the time of the  
NTP server at the address acquired from the  
DHCPv6 server. In order to set [Use DHCPv6], you  
must change [Network] > [IPv6] to [Enable], then set  
[Auto (DHCPv6)] to [Enable] (p. 38).  
[Date], [Time]  
The date and time currently set in the camera are  
shown.  
Setting  
[Use DHCP/DHCPv6]  
The camera time is synchronized with the time of the  
NTP server at the address acquired from the DHCP  
server or DHCPv6 server. Note that only one NTP  
server name (address) is used. If NTP server names  
(addresses) are acquired from both the DHCP  
server and DHCPv6 server, the server displayed in  
[NTP Server (DHCP)] is the one used.  
(1) [Setting Method]  
Select from [Set manually], [Synchronize with NTP  
server], [Synchronize with NTP broadcast],  
[Synchronize with computer time].  
(2) [Date], [Time]  
[Synchronize with NTP broadcast]  
Set the following according to the selection made in  
[Setting Method].  
The camera will synchronize with the NTP server  
time. The camera will synchronize time with NTP  
broadcasts received from the NTP server.  
[Set manually]  
Set the desired date and time. The date is set by <year/  
month/day>, and the time in 24-hour format in the  
order <hour:minute:second>  
[Synchronize with NTP server]  
The camera will synchronize with the NTP server  
time.  
[Synchronize with computer time]  
The camera will synchronize with the date and time  
of the computer currently accessing the camera.  
The [Time Zone] is not selected automatically, and  
must be set separately as required.  
(4) [Time Zone]  
(3) [Auto-Setting of NTP Server]  
Select from the list the appropriate time difference  
from the Greenwich Mean Time.  
[Disable]  
Select when specifying an arbitrary NTP server.  
Enter the IP address or host name of the NTP server  
used in [NTP Server].  
(5) [Daylight Saving Time]  
Select [Enable] to automatically adjust the daylight  
saving time according to the time zone or [Disable]  
not to automatically adjust the daylight saving time.  
Note  
• If [Synchronize with computer time] is selected, after clicking  
[Apply], [Setting Method] will change to [Set manually].  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
[Date and Time] Setting Date and Time  
• If [Synchronize with NTP server] is selected and the IP address  
of the NTP server is incorrect or a connection with the NTP  
server cannot otherwise be established, the date and time will  
not be changed.  
• The NTP server query interval is 300 seconds.  
• The camera's NTP broadcast mode does not support IPv6.  
• If the [Time Zone] setting is changed, the date and time  
display will update automatically according to the specified  
time zone.  
4
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[Camera] Setting Initial Camera Settings and External Device Name  
(1) [AE Mode], [Slow Shutter], [Shutter Speed]  
The following can be set here.  
Set the exposure control and shutter speed for the  
camera startup.  
Camera Name  
Enter the name of the camera. The camera name  
is required for use with RM-Lite.  
[AE Mode]  
[Auto]  
The exposure is controlled automatically.  
[Auto (Flickerless)]  
Initial Camera Settings  
Sets shooting settings at camera start up.  
In this mode, video flickers caused by fluorescent  
lights, etc., can be reduced. The shutter speed is  
automatically adjusted according to the brightness  
of the environment in which the camera is used.  
[Auto (Shutter-priority AE)]  
Camera Control  
Set the digital zoom, AGC limit, and smart shade  
control strength.  
Day/Night  
Set the day/night switching mode.  
In this mode, a desired shutter speed can be  
specified.  
Installation Conditions  
Sets installation conditions, such as LED settings.  
[Slow Shutter]  
Slow shutter can be used only if [Auto] or [Auto  
(Flickerless)] is selected in [AE Mode].  
Set the maximum slow shutter time to be used when  
in auto exposure mode when capturing video in a  
dark place. Select [Disable], [1/15], [1/8], [1/4] or  
[1/2]. As slower shutter speed generates residual  
video when capturing a moving subject, select an  
appropriate time according to the capture conditions.  
Camera Position Control  
Set whether or not to limit the pan, tilt and zoom  
operations to the preset positions. Also, set the  
camera position when nobody has control  
privileges.  
External Device Name  
Set the external input device name and external  
output device name.  
Camera Name  
[Shutter Speed]  
Shutter speed can be used only if [Auto (Shutter-priority  
AE)] is selected in [AE Mode].  
Select a desired shutter speed from the 16 levels from  
[1/2] to [1/16000]. When capturing a moving subject,  
selecting a higher shutter speed can reduce blurry video  
capture.  
[Camera Name]  
Be sure to enter [Camera Name (alphanumeric  
characters)].  
Up to 15 ASCII characters (spaces and printable  
characters) may be used for [Camera Name  
(alphanumeric characters)].  
(2) [Exposure Compensation]  
The exposure compensation when the camera starts  
can be set in the range of [-4 (Dark)] to [4 (Bright)]. To  
brighten the video, set a positive value. To darken the  
video, set a negative value.  
Note  
• The camera name set here will be shown when the camera is  
registered for use with included RM-Lite.  
Initial Camera Settings  
(3) [Metering Mode]  
Set the metering mode when the camera starts.  
[Center-Weighted]  
The entire screen is metered by focusing on the  
center of the screen.  
Even when slightly darker/brighter areas are present  
on the periphery of the screen, an appropriate  
exposure can be achieved for the subject near the  
center.  
Use this mode if the subject is positioned near the  
center of the screen.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
[Camera] Setting Initial Camera Settings and External Device Name  
[Average]  
[Daylight Fluorescent]  
The entire screen is metered by averaging.  
A stable exposure can be achieved even in a  
capture environment where there are notable  
brightness differences within the screen.  
Use this mode to stabilize the exposure in locations  
where vehicles or people are moving.  
[Spot]  
Select this option to capture video under daylight  
fluorescent lighting.  
[White Fluorescent]  
Select this option to capture video under daylight  
fluorescent or white fluorescent lighting.  
[Warm Fluorescent]  
Select this option to capture video under warm  
fluorescent lighting.  
[Mercury Lamp]  
Select this option to capture video under mercury  
lamps.  
[Sodium Lamp]  
Select this option to capture video under orange  
sodium lamps.  
4
The center of the screen is metered.  
An appropriate exposure can be achieved for the  
subject at the center of the screen regardless of the  
brightness/darkness on the periphery of the screen.  
Use this mode if you want to adjust the exposure to  
the center of the screen because the subject is  
receiving a spotlight or backlight, etc.  
[Halogen Lamp]  
(4) [Focus Mode]  
Select this option to capture video under halogen  
lamps or incandescent bulbs.  
Set the focus mode when camera starts.  
[Auto]  
Automatically brings the subject into focus. Normally  
[Auto] is selected.  
[Fixed at infinity]  
(7) [Noise Reduction]  
Select a level from [Mild], [Standard], or [Strong] for  
the noise reduction setting.  
The focus can be fixed to near infinity.  
Principally, this setting is more effective in low-light  
conditions. When set to [Strong], the noise reduction  
effect is increased, but the afterimage of moving  
subjects becomes easier to see. When set to [Mild],  
the noise reduction effect is decreased and resolution  
is increased, but the video file size becomes larger.  
(5) [Smart Shade Control]  
Set the smart shade control strength when the camera  
starts.  
[Disable]  
The smart shade control function is not used.  
[Manual]  
(8) [Sharpness]  
Set the smart shade control strength. Select a  
strength from [1 (Mild)] to [7 (Strong)] in [Smart  
Shade Control Level].  
Select a level from [1 (Mild)] to [7 (Strong)] for the  
sharpness setting.  
When set to [Strong] the video becomes sharper, and  
when set to [Mild] the video becomes softer. Also,  
when set to [Strong] the video file size becomes  
larger.  
[Auto]  
(9) [Color Saturation]  
Combines the smart shade control function and the  
exposure compensation function to automatically  
adjust the video so that there are no blown out  
highlights or blocked up shadows. Accordingly,  
when [Auto] is selected, [Smart Shade Control  
Level] and [Exposure Compensation] are not  
displayed.  
Select a level from [1 (Light)] to [7 (Dark)] for the color  
saturation setting.  
(10)[Day/Night]  
Set Day/Night mode to [Manual] or [Auto] when the  
camera starts.  
You can also switch between [Day Mode] and [Night  
Mode] using the Day/Night mode function of the  
Admin Viewer (p. 137).  
(6) [White Balance]  
Select the white balance according to the light source  
to achieve natural color in the video.  
[Auto]  
The white balance is adjusted automatically.  
[Manual]  
Set the values of red and blue gain according to the  
light source. Enter a value from 0 to 1023 for both  
the [R Gain] and [B Gain].  
Important  
• The initial camera settings (1) to (10) define the defaults that  
apply when the camera is started. Setting changes will be  
reflected only after the camera is reconnected or rebooted.  
Specify the settings used in the actual operating environment  
from the Admin Viewer (p. 133).  
• If the subject is a traffic signal or electronic scoreboard, etc.,  
the captured video may flicker.  
In this case, try changing the [AE Mode] setting to [Auto  
(Shutter-priority AE)] and selecting a shutter speed lower  
than 1/100 to see if the problem improves.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
• Even if [AE Mode] is set to [Auto (Flickerless)], some screen  
flicker may still occur under unstable light source conditions.  
Day Mode/Night Mode  
Focus Mode  
Max. Wide-angle  
0.3m(12in.)infinity  
Max. Telephoto  
• Setting a slow shutter speed may make it impossible for  
intelligent functions to work correctly. Select a shutter speed  
that suits the capture conditions and purpose.  
0.3m(12in.)infinity  
Auto  
Fixed at infinity  
Focused at infinity  
In conditions where an outdoor scene is captured  
from an indoor location through a glass window, the camera  
may focus on the glass surface if there is dust or water there.  
Install the camera at the shortest possible distance from the  
glass surface.  
Camera Control  
• If [Auto] is selected for [Day/Night], conduct a thorough  
operation test to check the effectiveness of the setting  
beforehand.  
(1) [Digital Zoom]  
Set digital zoom to [Disable] or [Enable].  
The higher the digital zoom ratio, the lower the video  
quality becomes.  
• If [Auto] is selected for [Day/Night], set [Exposure] of the  
Admin Viewer to [Auto], [Auto (Flickerless)] or [Auto (Shutter-  
priority AE)] (p. 135).  
(2) [AGC Limit]  
Select one of 5 levels from 1 to 5 to automatically set  
the upper gain limit. The greater the value, the higher  
the sensitivity becomes. If you do not want to use the  
automatic gain adjustment, select [OFF]. Setting  
[AGC Limit] allows you to reduce noise when  
capturing video in low illumination.  
However, when [Auto (Shutter-priority AE)] is being used,  
night mode may not be activated even if [Day/Night] is set to  
[Auto], depending on the shutter speed.  
• Though the camera has an infrared filter, there is no effect on  
lighting due to infrared light as the camera does not have an  
insertion/removal mechanism for the filter.  
• When Day/Night Mode is set to [Manual], in addition to the  
Day/Night function of the Admin Viewer (p. 137), it is also  
possible to switch Day/Night Mode via settings in [Setting  
Page] > [Event] > [External Device Input] (p. 57) or [Event] >  
(3) [Smart Shade Control Strength (Auto)]  
Select [Mild], [Medium], or [Strong] for the control  
strength when [Smart Shade Control] (p. 43) is set to  
[Auto].  
Important  
Note  
• [AGC Limit] is disabled when [Exposure] is set to [Manual] or  
[Auto (Flickerless)] in the Admin Viewer.  
• Focusing may be difficult for the following types of subjects  
when [Focus] is set to [Auto] or [One-shot AF].  
• Minimum subject illumination may change when [AGC Limit]  
is set.  
Subjects Difficult to Focus On  
Day/Night (when Auto is set)  
A white wall or other  
subject lacking  
bright/dark contrast  
A slanting  
subject  
A subject  
reflecting  
strong light  
(1) [Switching Brightness]  
Set the brightness at which Day Mode and Night  
Mode will be switched when [Auto] is selected in  
[Day/Night]. Select [Darker], [Slightly Darker],  
[Standard], [Slightly Brighter] or [Brighter]. Select  
[Darker] if you want to capture video in color as much  
as possible.  
A subject consisting  
of only slanted lines  
or horizontal stripes  
A subject having  
no form, such as  
flame or smoke  
A subject seen  
through glass  
Select [Brighter] to reduce noise. Note that this mode  
switches to black & white sooner.  
A fast moving  
subject  
A dark area or  
night view  
Subjects both  
near and far  
(2) [Response (sec.)]  
Set the time in seconds needed for judgment on  
switching between Day Mode and Night Mode when  
[Auto] is selected in [Day/Night]. Select [60], [30],  
[20], [10] or [5].  
• After rebooting the camera, it is recommended that you check  
whether the camera is focusing correctly.  
• The focus ranges (approximate) are shown in the table below.  
The mode will switch between Day Mode and Night  
Mode if brightness remains above or below the level  
set in (1) for the number of seconds specified.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
[Camera] Setting Initial Camera Settings and External Device Name  
Select [30] or [60] if brightness changes frequently,  
such as when a light source passes in front of the  
camera. Select [5] or [10] if change in brightness is  
minimal.  
Note  
The external device name set here will be shown when the Admin  
Viewer or included RM-Lite is used.  
Installation Conditions  
4
(1) [LED Setting]  
Select [Turn Off] or [Turn On] for the LED operation  
status on the camera. Set to [Turn Off] if you do not  
want to turn on the LED.  
(2) [Image Flip]  
Select [Disable] or [Enable] for the orientation of the  
camera video.  
Note  
The LED will light for several seconds when booting even if the  
[LED Setting] is set to [Turn Off].  
Camera Position Control  
(1) [Restricted to Presets]  
Set the camera control preset to [No Restriction] or  
[Preset Only]. The administrator can limit camera  
control by non-administrators to preset angles by  
selecting [Preset Only].  
(2) [Camera Position without Control]  
Select either [Do not return to Home Position] or  
[Return to Home Position] as the action when no  
control privileges are requested by users and the  
home position has already been set.  
When [Return to Home Position] is selected and no  
users have control privileges, the camera moves  
automatically to the home position. This function  
requires the home position of the camera be set in  
advance. Set the home position using Preset Setting  
External Input Device / External Output Device  
[Device Name] for external input device/external output  
device  
Be sure to enter each device name in order to identify  
the corresponding external device being connected.  
Enter [Device Name (alphanumeric characters)] using  
up to 15 characters (ASCII characters (space or  
printable characters) excluding the double quotation  
mark (“)).  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
[Video] Setting Video Size, Quality and Frame Rate  
JPEG  
The following can be set here.  
All Videos  
Specify the set of video sizes used by the camera.  
JPEG  
Set the video quality, size, maximum frame rate  
and upload size in JPEG.  
(1) [Video Quality]  
H.264  
Select a desired video quality from 1 to 5 (5 levels) for  
videos transmitted at each video size in JPEG.  
Greater values have higher quality.  
Set the bit rate, video size and capture frame rate  
in H.264.  
On-screen display  
(2) [Video Size: video Transmission]  
Set time, character string, etc. displayed over  
video.  
Select the size of the transmitted video. The video  
sizes that can be selected depend on the [Video Size  
Set] setting. This becomes the start-up video size  
used by each viewer if no video size has been set.  
All Videos  
(3) [Maximum Frame Rate: Video Transmission]  
Limit the maximum transmission frame rate per  
second to reduce the viewer load. The maximum is 30  
frames/sec. Enter a value of between 0.1 and 30.0.  
(1) [Video Size Set]  
Select the set of video sizes used by the camera from  
[1920 x 1080 / 960 x 540 / 480 x 270], [1280 x 720 / 640  
x 360 / 320 x 180], or [1280 x 960 / 640 x 480 / 320 x 240].  
All options in the [Video] menu and the size set that can  
be selected in [Video Size] are determined by the set  
selected here.  
(4) [Video Size: Upload / Memory card]  
Select the size of video when using the upload  
function (p. 51) or when recording to a memory card  
(p. 69). The video sizes that can be selected depend  
on the [Video Size Set] setting. Use [Event] > [Video  
Record Action] (p. 56) to specify the destination of a  
video recording (upload or memory card recording).  
[Video Size Set]  
Category  
1080p  
Aspect ratio  
[1920 x 1080 / 960 x 540 /  
480 x 270]  
16:9  
H.264(1)  
[1280 x 720 / 640 x 360 /  
320 x 180]  
720p  
4:3  
16:9  
4:3  
[1280 x 960 / 640 x 480 /  
320 x 240]  
Configure settings using H.264(1) when using H.264  
video for upload or memory card recording. H.264(2)  
video cannot be used for upload, memory card recording,  
and RM-Lite.  
Important  
• Changing the [Video Size Set] setting will disconnect all  
connections and then change all the video sizes.  
Consequently, users connected to the camera must  
reconnect.  
(1) [Video Size]  
Select the size of the transmitted video. The video  
sizes that can be selected depend on the [Video Size  
Set] setting.  
• If the [Video Size Set] selection is changed and you click  
[Apply and Reboot], review the following settings and check  
the operation.  
- Privacy mask settings  
- View restriction settings  
- Preset settings  
- Intelligent function settings  
(2) [Bit Rate Control]  
Select [Do not use bit rate control] or [Use bit rate  
control].  
Select [Use bit rate control] when [Video Format]  
under [Upload] is set to [H.264(1)] or when [Video  
Format] under [Memory Card] is set to [H.264(1)].  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
[Video] Setting Video Size, Quality and Frame Rate  
(3) [Target Bit Rate (kbps)]  
Important  
If [Use bit rate control] is selected in (2), select a  
desired target bit rate from the 17 levels from [64] to  
[16384].  
• When [H.264(1)] is selected for the memory card recording  
and upload settings, the following restrictions apply to the  
[H.264(1)] setting.  
- Only [Use bit rate control] can be selected for [Bit Rate  
Control].  
(4) [Video Quality]  
If [Do not use bit rate control] is selected in (2), select  
a desired quality from 1 to 5 (total 5 levels) for H.264  
video transmission.  
- Only [3072] or less can be selected for [Target Bit Rate  
(kbps)].  
4
- Only one of [0.5], [1], and [1.5] can be selected for [I  
Frame Interval (sec)].  
Greater values have higher quality.  
(5) [Frame Rate (fps)]  
• Network load will increase if a larger video size is set or  
higher video quality and target bit rate are set, as this  
increases data size per frame. As a result, the following could  
occur:  
Select [30], [15], [10], [6], [5], [3], [2] or [1] (fps) for  
the frame rate of video transmitted.  
Important  
JPEG: The frame rate may drop  
When streaming two H.264 videos, setting the video size  
settings for H.264(1) and H.264(2) to the following  
combinations restricts the frame rate to a maximum of 15 fps.  
For all other combinations, a frame rate of up to 30 fps can be  
selected.  
H.264: Video may be temporarily disrupted  
• Block noise may become noticeable if a large video size and  
low target bit rate are set.  
• The data size may increase depending on the type or  
movement of the subject. If the frame rate remains low or  
other undesirable conditions continue for a prolonged  
period, lower the video size or quality setting.  
H.264(1)  
1920 x 1080  
H.264(2)  
All sizes  
All sizes  
1920 x 1080  
1280 x 960  
1280 X 720  
• Note that if you are using included RM-Lite, the hard disk  
usage will also be affected during recording.  
1280 x 960  
1280 x 720  
• H.264 video can be displayed using Admin Viewer and RM-  
Lite. However, it cannot be displayed using VB Viewer.  
(6) [I Frame Interval (sec)]  
Select [0.5], [1], [1.5], [2], [3], [4] or [5] for the I frame  
interval (sec) for H.264 video.  
On-screen display  
H.264(2)  
(1) [H.264(2)]  
Select [Enable] to distribute H.264 video using two  
(1) [Date display]  
Select whether to enable date display over video. If  
[Enable] is selected, date information will be  
displayed over video.  
streams.  
Note that H.264(2) video cannot be used for upload,  
memory card recording, or RM-Lite.  
Refer to the settings for “H.264(1)” for details about  
[Video Size], [Bit Rate Control], [Target Bit Rate  
(kbps)], [Video Quality], [Frame Rate (fps)], and [I  
Frame Interval (sec)] settings.  
(2) [Position of date display]  
Select [Upper left], [Upper right], [Lower left] or  
[Lower right] for the position of date display  
information.  
(3) [Format of date display]  
Select [YYYY/MM/DD], [DD/MM/YYYY] or [MM/DD/  
YYYY] for the format of the date display.  
(4) [Time display]  
Select whether to enable time display over video. If  
[Enable] is selected, display time information will be  
displayed over video.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
(5) [Position of time display]  
Select [Upper left], [Upper right], [Lower left] or  
[Lower right] for the position of time display  
information.  
(6) [Text display]  
Select [Display nothing], [Display designated string]  
or [Display camera name] for the text string to display  
over video.  
If [Display designated string] is selected, the [Text  
string display] set in (8) will be displayed.  
If [Display camera name] is selected, the text string  
set in [Camera Name (alphanumeric characters)]  
under [Camera] will be shown (p. 42).  
(7) [Position of text display]  
Select the position of text display from [Upper left],  
[Upper right], [Lower left] or [Lower right].  
(8) [Text string display]  
If [Display designated string] is selected in (6) [Text  
display], you can enter a text string of up to 15 ASCII  
characters (spaces and printable characters) for  
superimposed display on the video.  
(9) [Color of text]  
Select [Black], [Blue], [Cyan], [Green], [Yellow],  
[Red], [Magenta] or [White] for the color of text to be  
displayed over the video.  
(10)[Color of text outline]  
Select [Black], [Blue], [Cyan], [Green], [Yellow],  
[Red], [Magenta] or [White] for the color of text  
outline.  
(11)[Color depth of text and outline]  
Select [Fill text and outline], [Make text only  
transparent], [Make text only translucent] or [Make  
text and outline translucent] for the color depth of text  
and outline to be displayed over the video.  
Important  
The on-screen time display is not suitable for usage where high  
reliability is required. Use as reference information only where  
utmost and constant reliability is required for surveillance.  
Note  
• The on-screen time display may not correspond with camera  
time by several seconds (p. 40).  
• Depending on video quality settings, on-screen display may  
become difficult to decipher. Set after confirming appearance  
on actual video.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[RTP]  
RTP Server, Audio Multicast and RTP Streaming  
value reaches 0, the signal can no longer be  
The following can be set here.  
distributed. For example, if TTL is set to [1], multicast  
distribution is confined to the local segment only and  
cannot be distributed by the router.  
4
RTP Server  
Enable RTP, and set the RTSP authentication  
method and port number.  
Audio Multicast  
Make settings for multicast audio transmission.  
RTP Streaming 1 to 5  
You can make settings for each stream, RTP Streaming 1  
to RTP Streaming 5, in a 5-session RTP stream  
distribution.  
RTP Streaming 1 to 5  
Make settings for RTP streaming of video,  
multicasting, and audio transmission.  
RTP Server  
(1) [Video Size]  
Select [480x270 JPEG], [960x540 JPEG], [1920x1080  
JPEG], [H.264(1)], or [H.264(2)] for the format and  
size of video for RTP streaming.  
[H.264(1)] and [H.264(2)] cannot be set for multiple  
RTP streams.  
(1) [RTP]  
Set RTP to [Disable] or [Enable].  
(2) [RTSP Authentication Method]  
Set the RTSP authentication method to [Basic  
Authentication], [Digest Authentication], or [No  
Authentication].  
(2) [Frame Rate]  
Set the frame rate if the RTP stream is JPEG video.  
Cannot be configured for H.264.  
(3) [RTSP Port]  
Set the RTSP port number to 554 or in the range of  
1024 to 65535.  
(3) [Multicast Address]  
Set the multicast address for RTP streaming in the  
range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 (IPv4) or an  
address beginning with ff00::/8 (IPv6).  
To disable Multicast, set to [0.0.0.0] (IPv4) or [::0(::)]  
(IPv6).  
Normally [554] (factory default setting) is used.  
Audio Multicast  
(4) [Multicast Port]  
Set the multicast port number for RTP streaming to an  
even number in the range 1024 to 65534.  
To disable Multicast, set to [0].  
(1) [Multicast Address]  
Set the multicast address for audio transmission in the  
range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 (IPv4) or an  
address beginning with ff00::/8 (IPv6).  
To disable Multicast, set to [0.0.0.0] (IPv4) or [::0(::)]  
(IPv6).  
(5) [Multicast TTL]  
Set the effective scope of multicast distribution for  
RTP streaming between 0 and 255.  
To disable Multicast, set to [0].  
The TTL (Time To Live), representing the effective  
scope of multicast distribution, is decremented each  
time the signal passes through a router. When the  
value reaches 0, the signal can no longer be  
distributed. For example, if TTL is set to [1], multicast  
distribution is confined to the local segment only and  
cannot be distributed by the router.  
(2) [Multicast Port]  
Set the multicast port number for audio transmission  
to an even number in the range 1024 to 65534.  
To disable Multicast, set to [0].  
(3) [Multicast TTL]  
Set the effective scope of multicast distribution  
between 0 and 255.  
To disable Multicast, set to [0].  
(6) [Audio Transmission]  
The TTL (Time To Live), representing the effective  
scope of multicast distribution, is decremented each  
time the signal passes through a router. When the  
Set RTP streaming audio transmission to [Disable] or  
[Enable].  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Note  
• RTP stream URL  
rtsp://IP_address:port_number/rtpstream/config1(~5)=r|u|m  
[=r|u|m] is optional and can be omitted. If specified, specify  
only one option.  
r: Requests RTP over TCP  
u: Requests RTP over UDP  
m: Requests multicast  
Example: RTP streaming 1 request using RTP over TCP  
rtsp://192.168.100.1:554/rtpstream/config1=r  
Note that the actual operation is dependent on the RTP client  
application, so the URL does not necessarily specify the  
method used for transmission.  
• The video quality and, when H.264 is selected, bit rate control,  
video size, and frame rate, are determined by the [Video]  
settings.  
• Regardless of the [Server] > [Audio Server] > [Audio  
Transmission from the Camera] setting, RTP streaming audio  
will be used.  
However, to use audio settings, select [Enable] for [Audio  
Transmission from the Camera] and make the settings.  
• The [Access Control] > [User Authority] > [Video Distribution]  
and [Audio Distribution] settings are not used for RTP.  
• RTP streaming video may not be viewable on systems using a  
proxy server or firewall. If the video cannot be viewed, contact  
the system administrator.  
• If host access restrictions are applied to a client while it is  
streaming using RTP over UDP, it may take from a few to  
several seconds until streaming ceases.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[Upload]  
Setting HTTP/FTP Upload and E-mail Notification  
of seconds for an [H.264(1)] selection in [Video  
Format].  
The following can be set here.  
4
General Upload  
Set the upload operation to be performed and the  
video buffer.  
Important  
• If the upload function is used, either the [Event] menu must  
be set (p. 56) or the [Event] tab in the Intelligent Function  
Setting Tool (p. 104) must be set.  
HTTP Upload  
Set HTTP connection uploads.  
• If you are using both e-mail notification by text and video and  
video upload by HTTP/FTP, set [Video Size: Upload / Memory  
card] (p. 46) to a small size.  
FTP Upload  
Set FTP connection uploads.  
E-mail Notification  
Set event information and video e-mail  
notifications.  
• HTTP upload does not support SSL/TLS.  
• If the camera is set to perform upload or e-mail notification  
continuously, not all video or e-mails may be sent depending  
on the video size and the network condition to the server. In  
this case, an event log message is displayed (p. 73).  
General Upload  
• If the destination for HTTP/FTP upload or e-mail notification is  
set for a Windows operating system, IPsec communication  
cannot be applied.  
• When an H.264 video is uploaded, the following restrictions  
apply to [H.264(1)] of [Video] (p. 46).  
- Only [Use bit rate control] can be selected for [Bit Rate  
Control].  
- Only [3072] or less can be selected for [Target Bit Rate  
(kbps)].  
- Only one of [0.5], [1], and [1.5] can be selected for [I  
Frame Interval (sec)].  
(1) [Upload]  
Select [Upload Disabled], [HTTP Upload] or [FTP  
Upload] for the upload method.  
• The maximum video buffer size capacity is approx. 5 MB.  
If a large video size is set, the Frame Rate, Pre-event Buffer  
and Post-event Buffer may not be achieved as specified.  
(2) [Video Format]  
Select the [JPEG] or [H.264(1)] format for video you  
want to upload.  
• If buffering cannot be achieved as specified, a message is  
written to the event log (p. 73).  
Before using a large video size, confirm that no messages  
appear in the event log.  
If [H.264(1)] is selected, video is uploaded with the  
settings defined under [Video] > [H.264(1)] (p. 46).  
[H.264(2)] cannot be used.  
(3) [Frame Rate]  
Note  
Enter the maximum frame rate of video to be  
uploaded. This setting can only be made when  
[JPEG] is selected for [Video Format].  
The server or network load may increase and the frame rate may  
drop, depending on the settings. If this occurs, try the following  
measures. Also check the settings including the network to the  
server.  
(4) [Pre-event Buffer (number of frames)] / [Pre-event  
Buffer (sec)]  
• Reduce the video file size:  
– Set a lower value under [Video Quality] for [JPEG]/  
[H.264(1)] (p. 46).  
– Set a lower value for [Video Size: Upload / Memory card] for  
– Set a lower value for [Video Size] for [H.264(1)] (p. 46).  
– Set a lower value under [Target Bit Rate (kbps)] for  
[H.264(1)] (p. 47).  
Enter the number of frames or seconds of video to be  
buffered before the event. The maximum amount is  
number of frames for a [JPEG] selection and number  
of seconds for an [H.264(1)] selection in [Video  
Format].  
(5) [Post-event Buffer (number of frames)] / [Post-event  
Buffer (sec)]  
• Reduce the uploading frequency:  
– Reduce the value in [Pre-event Buffer] or [Post-event Buffer]  
(p. 51).  
– If [Volume Detection Event] is enabled, disabled [ON Event  
Operation], [OFF Event Operation], or [Ongoing On Event  
Operation] (p. 56).  
Enter the number of frames or seconds of video to be  
buffered after the event. The maximum amount is  
number of frames for a [JPEG] selection and number  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
– From the Intelligent Function Setting Tool [Event] tab >  
disable [ON Event Operation], [OFF Event Operation] or  
[Detected mode Operation] (p. 104).  
– If [External Device Input Event] is enabled, disable [Active  
Event Operation], [Inactive Event Operation], or [Ongoing  
Active Event Operation] (p. 57).  
Important  
• Enter [Proxy Server], [Proxy Port], [Proxy User Name] and  
[Proxy Password] if connecting via a proxy.  
• For information about the HTTP upload function and settings,  
contact your nearest Canon Customer Service Center.  
– If [Timer Event] is enabled, increase the value in [Repeat  
HTTP Upload  
FTP Upload  
The HTTP upload function sends notifications via HTTP or  
via HTTP with attached videos, depending on the network  
camera event.  
(1) [Notification]  
The content of notification is set to [Video data upload  
with FTP].  
(2) [FTP Server]  
(1) [Notification]  
Enter the host name or IP address of the FTP server  
(using up to 63 characters).  
Select [Notification Only with HTTP] or [Video  
attached Notification with HTTP] as the content of  
notification.  
(3) [User Name], [Password]  
Enter the user name and password required for  
authentication.  
(2) [URI]  
Enter the URI to be uploaded to (using up to 255  
characters).  
(4) [PASV Mode]  
Select [Disable] or [Enable] for the PASV mode when  
uploading via FTP.  
(3) [User Name], [Password]  
Enter the user name and password required for  
authentication.  
(5) [File Upload Path]  
Digest authentication is not supported.  
Enter the path to the folder where the video file is to be  
uploaded to (using up to 255 characters).  
(4) [Proxy Server]  
Enter the host name or IP address of the proxy server  
(using up to 63 characters).  
(6) [File Naming]  
Set a desired file naming rule.  
[YYYYMMDDHHMMSSms]  
(5) [Proxy Port]  
Video is uploaded according to the file name format  
of  
Enter the port number of the proxy server (factory  
default setting is [80]).  
“{year}{month}{day}{hour}{minute}{second}{ms}.jpg”.  
(Example: 20130123112122000.jpg)  
[YYYYMMDD Directory/HHMMSSms]  
A subdirectory named “{year}{month}{day}” is  
created first, and then the video is uploaded using  
the file name “{hour}{minute}{second}{ms}.jpg”.  
(Example: 20130123/112122000.jpg)  
(6) [Proxy User Name], [Proxy Password]  
Enter the user name and password of the proxy  
server.  
Digest authentication is not supported.  
(7) [Parameter (query string)]  
Enter the parameter (using up to 127 characters).  
Parameters can be specified using the “%” character  
(p. 144).  
[Loop]  
(8) [HTTP Upload Test]  
Video is loaded with a file name numbered up to the  
value set in [Maximum Number of Loops].  
(Example: 0000.jpg, 0001.jpg)  
[Maximum Number of Loops]  
If [Loop] is set under [File Naming], enter the  
maximum number of loops in the range of 0 to 9999.  
Clicking [Exec] initiates an upload test based on the  
settings currently entered. Only one JPEG image is  
uploaded. It is not necessary to click [Apply].  
After entering a password, first click [Exec], then  
[Apply] the password.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
[Upload] Setting HTTP/FTP Upload and E-mail Notification  
[User Setting]  
[User Name], [Password], [POP Server]  
Video is uploaded according to the file naming  
method specified in [Subdirectory Name to Create]  
and [File Name to Create].  
[Subdirectory Name to Create], [File Name to  
Create]  
If [POP before SMTP] is selected as the e-mail  
authentication mode, enter the user name and  
password as well as the host name or IP address of  
the POP server required for authentication.  
4
If file naming is set to [User Setting], enter the  
subdirectory name to be created as well as the  
name of the created file (using up to 127  
characters). Parameters can be specified in the  
entry with the “%” character (p. 144).  
[User Name], [Password]  
If [SMTP-AUTH] is selected as the e-mail  
authentication method, enter the user name and  
password required for authentication.  
(7) [FTP Upload Test]  
Clicking [Exec] initiates an upload test based on the  
settings currently entered. Only one JPEG image is  
uploaded. It is not necessary to click [Apply].  
After entering a password, first click [Exec], then  
[Apply] the password.  
(7) [Subject]  
Enter the subject of the e-mail to be sent using up to  
31 ASCII characters.  
(8) [Message Body]  
Enter the message (text) of the e-mail to be sent using  
up to 255 ASCII characters. Parameters can be  
specified with the “%” character (p. 144).  
E-mail Notification  
(9) [E-mail Notification Test]  
Clicking [Exec] initiates an e-mail notification test  
based on the settings currently entered. It is not  
necessary to click [Apply].  
After entering a password, first click [Exec], then  
[Apply] the password.  
(1) [Notification]  
Select [Text Only] or [Text with Image] as the content  
of notification. If [Upload] is set to [Upload Disabled],  
[Text with Image] will not be available.  
(2) [Mail Server Name]  
Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server  
(using up to 63 characters).  
(3) [Mail Server Port]  
Enter the port number of the SMTP server (factory  
default setting is [25]).  
(4) [Sender (From)]  
Set the e-mail address of the sender (using up to 63  
characters).  
(5) [Recipient (To)]  
Set the e-mail address of the recipient (using up to 63  
characters).  
(6) [Authentication]  
Select [None], [POP before SMTP] or [SMTP-AUTH]  
for the e-mail authentication method.  
Set an appropriate method according to the  
authentication method used by the SMTP server to  
send to.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
[Server]  
Setting the Video Server, Audio Server and HTTP Server  
(2) [Input Volume]  
The following can be set here.  
Set the volume of input for the microphone connected  
to the camera in the range of 1 to 100. The greater the  
value, the larger the input volume becomes.  
Video Server  
Set the video transmission from the camera.  
Audio Server  
Set the audio transmission from the camera.  
(3) [Voice Activity Detection]  
If [Enable] is selected, the audio transmission is  
stopped temporarily when no audio is output. This  
way, the load of the applicable network can be  
reduced.  
HTTP Server  
Set the authentication method, and HTTP port  
number.  
(4) [Audio Input]  
Set the microphone input. Select [Line In],  
[Microphone In (dynamic microphone)] or  
[Microphone In (condenser microphone)].  
Video Server  
• Audio Transmission  
• Input Volume  
• Voice Activity Detection  
(1) [Maximum Number of Clients]  
Set the maximum number of clients that can be  
connected to the camera at the same time. Up to 30  
clients can be set.  
Caution  
If 0 is set, connection is prohibited except for the  
Administrator.  
Switch line in and microphone in on each setting page  
according to the specification of the microphone.  
Using the wrong input may damage the camera and/or  
microphone. Be sure to configure settings correctly.  
(2) [Camera Control Queue Length]  
Set the maximum queue length for clients requesting  
camera control privilege from the viewer. The  
maximum number is 30. Enter an integer from 0 to 30.  
If 0 is set, camera control is prohibited except for the  
Administrator.  
Important  
• Video and audio can be distributed to up to 30 clients.  
However, when there are many clients or they are connected  
to the camera over an SSL connection, the video frame rate  
may slow down and the sound may drop out if audio  
reception from the camera is enabled.  
(3) [Maximum Connection Time (sec.)]  
Set the time in seconds during which an individual  
client can connect to the camera. The maximum  
number is 65535. Enter an integer from 0 to 65535. If 0  
is set, the connection time becomes unlimited.  
• The volume, sound quality, etc., may change depending on  
the characteristics of the microphone used.  
• If the [Input Volume] settings are changed after setting volume  
detection, check the detection setting again.  
(4) [Camera Control Time (sec.)]  
Set the maximum time during which the viewer can  
control the camera. The maximum number is 3600.  
Enter an integer from 1 to 3600.  
• The video and audio may not be synchronized.  
• The audio may be temporarily interrupted, depending on the  
performance of the computer and the network environment.  
Audio Server  
• The audio may be interrupted if anti-virus software is  
enabled.  
• Communication may be temporarily interrupted, cutting off  
the audio, if the LAN cable is unplugged and plugged in  
again. If this occurs, reconnect from the Viewer.  
(1) [Audio Transmission from the Camera]  
When [Enable] is selected, the audio input through the  
microphone attached to the camera can be  
transmitted to the Viewer.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
[Server] Setting the Video Server, Audio Server and HTTP Server  
HTTP Server  
(1) [Authentication Method]  
Set the authentication method used with the HTTP  
server to [Basic Authentication] or [Digest  
Authentication].  
4
(2) [HTTP Port]  
Set the HTTP port number to 80 or in the range of  
1024 to 65535.  
Normally [80] (factory default setting) is used.  
(3) [HTTPS Port]  
Set the HTTPS port number to 443 or in the range of  
1024 to 65535.  
Normally [443] (factory default setting) is used.  
Important  
If the setting of [HTTP Port] or [HTTPS Port] is changed, the  
camera may become inaccessible from the active web  
browser. Check beforehand the precautions in “Important” in  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
[Event]  
Setting Video Record, Volume Detection, External Device Output/Input and  
Timer  
Volume Detection  
The following can be set here.  
Video Record Setting  
Set where video is recorded when an event  
occurs.  
Volume Detection  
Set the operation to be performed at the time of  
volume detection.  
External Device Output  
Set external device output.  
(1) [Volume Detection Event]  
External Device Input  
Set volume detection to [Disable] or [Enable].  
Set the operation to be performed when an event  
is triggered by input from an external device.  
(2) [Detect Criteria]  
Set the criteria for generating volume detection events  
to [The reference volume level or above] or [The  
reference volume level or below].  
Timer  
Set timer events.  
(3) [Reference Volume Level]  
Set the reference volume level for detection in the  
range of 0 to 100.  
Video Record Setting  
Perform an actual test at the volume level before  
setting the value.  
(1) [Video Record Action]  
Select the destination of a video recorded when an  
event occurs. To record to a server selected on the  
[Upload] in the setting page, select [Upload] and to  
record to a memory card inserted in the camera,  
select [Record to Memory Card].  
(4) [Detect Criteria Duration (sec)]  
Set the duration of the detect criteria in the range of 0  
to 10 (sec.). When the status meeting the detect  
criteria has continued for the duration or longer, an  
ON event is generated.  
Note  
(5) [ON Event Operation]  
The size and format of video recorded according to the [Video  
Record Action] settings are as follows:  
Select the operation to be performed upon an ON  
event. If [Enable] is selected, (8) [Preset], (9) [Video  
Record] and (10) [E-mail Notification] will be executed  
according to their settings upon an ON event.  
[Video Record  
Applied video format  
Applied video size  
Action] settings  
[Upload]  
[Upload] > [Video  
Format] settings  
[Memory Card] >  
[Video Format]  
settings  
When the video format is  
[JPEG], [Video] > [JPEG] >  
[Video Size: Upload /  
Memory card]  
(6) [OFF Event Operation]  
Select the operation to be performed upon an OFF  
event. If [Enable] is selected, (8) [Preset], (9) [Video  
Record] and (10) [E-mail Notification] will be executed  
according to their settings upon an OFF event.  
[Record to  
Memory Card]  
When the video format is  
[H.264(1)], [Video] >  
[H.264(1)] > [Video Size]  
(7) [Ongoing On Event Operation]  
Select the operation to be performed while a volume  
detection event is in progress.  
Settings must be made in the above setting page to make  
an actual video recording.  
If [Enable] is selected, (9) [Video Record] and (10) [E-  
mail Notification] will be executed according to their  
settings during the volume detection event.  
(8) [Preset]  
If a preset is specified, the camera will orient  
automatically to the specified preset position when a  
volume detection event occurs. To use presets, it is  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
[Event] Setting Video Record, Volume Detection, External Device Output/Input and Timer  
necessary to set the presets with the Preset Setting  
(3) [Pulse Output Time (sec)]  
Tool under Admin Tools (p. 90). If there is no need for  
additional camera operation, select [None].  
Enter the pulse output time in the range of 1 to 120  
(sec.). This setting is available when [Active Output  
Format] is [Pulse].  
(9) [Video Record]  
Specify the video record action. If [Enable] is  
selected, video will be transmitted to the destination  
selected in [Video Record Action] (p. 56) when a  
volume detection event occurs.  
Important  
When [Active Output Format] is set to [Pulse] and a timer is  
used, a single contact output is controlled when the timer starts.  
4
(10)[E-mail Notification]  
Select the e-mail notification operation to be  
performed. If [Enable] is selected, e-mail notification  
is performed when a volume detection event occurs.  
To use this function, [Upload] > [E-mail Notification]  
must also be set (p. 53).  
Note  
[Normally Open] means that the contacts are normally in the  
open state (that the circuit is non-conductive), and [Normally  
Close] means that the contacts are normally in the closed state  
(that the circuit is conductive).  
Normally Open  
(11)[External Device Output for ON Event]  
Select whether external device output is active or  
inactive upon an ON event. Select [Disable] to disable  
external device output.  
Active Event  
1 (Terminals close)  
0 (Terminals open)  
Inactive Event  
Normally Close  
(12)[External Device Output for OFF Event]  
Select whether external device output is active or  
inactive upon an OFF event. Select [Disable] to  
disable external device output.  
Inactive Event  
1 (Terminals close)  
0 (Terminals open)  
Active Event  
Important  
External Device Input  
• For notes on use of volume detection, see “Safety  
• When Admin Viewer/VB Viewer has camera control  
privileges, those camera control privileges are released if the  
camera is moved to a preset position, specified in the  
[Preset] settings (VB-S30D/VB-S31D only), by a volume  
detection event operation.  
(1) [External Device Input Event]  
External Device Output  
Set external device input events to [Disable] or  
[Enable].  
(2) [Operation Mode]  
Select the circuit condition of the connected external  
device.  
(1) [Operation Mode]  
Select the normal (inactive) circuit condition.  
When [Normally Open] is selected, the output  
terminals remain in the open state during normal  
operation, and the terminals close upon an active  
event and open upon an inactive event.  
When [Normally Close] is selected, the output  
terminals remain in the closed state during normal  
operation, and the terminals open upon an active  
event and close upon an inactive event.  
When [Normally Open] is selected, an active event  
occurs when the terminals of the external device  
close, and an inactive event occurs when the  
terminals open.  
When [Normally Close] is selected, an active event  
occurs when the terminals of the external device  
open, and an inactive event occurs when the  
terminals close.  
(3) [Active Event Operation]  
(2) [Active Output Format]  
Select the operation to be performed upon an active  
event. If [Enable] is selected, (6) [Preset], (7) [Video  
Record] and (8) [E-mail Notification] will be executed  
according to their settings upon an active event.  
Select [Pulse] or [Continuous] for the external device  
output format.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
(4) [Inactive Event Operation]  
Important  
Select the operation to be performed upon an inactive  
event. If [Enable] is selected, (6) [Preset], (7) [Video  
Record] and (8) [E-mail Notification] will be executed  
according to their settings upon an inactive event.  
• When [Day/Night] in the Admin Viewer is set to [Auto], Day/  
Night Mode switching will not happen when an external  
device input event is triggered (p. 137).  
• When Admin Viewer/VB Viewer has camera control privileges,  
those camera control privileges are released if the camera is  
moved to a preset position, specified in the [Preset] settings  
(VB-S30D/VB-S31D only), by an external device input event  
operation, or if the day/night mode is switched by the [Day/Night  
Mode Switching] function.  
(5) [Ongoing Active Event Operation]  
Select the operation to be performed while an active  
event is in progress.  
If [Enable] is selected, (7) [Video Record] and (8) [E-  
mail Notification] will be executed according to their  
settings during the active event.  
(6) [Preset]  
Timer  
If a preset is specified, the camera will automatically  
orient to the specified preset position when an  
external device input event occurs. To use presets, it  
is necessary to set presets with the Preset Setting Tool  
under Admin Tools (p. 90). If there is no need for  
additional camera operation, select [None].  
(7) [Video Record]  
Specify the video record action. If [Enable] is  
selected, video will be transmitted to the destination  
selected in [Video Record Action] (p. 56) when an  
external device input event occurs.  
(1) [Timer Event]  
Select [Disable] or [Enable] for timer event.  
(2) [Start Time]  
Set the start time of the timer event in 24-hour format.  
(8) [E-mail Notification]  
(3) [End Time]  
Select the e-mail notification operation to be  
performed. If [Enable] is selected, e-mail  
notification will be performed when an external  
device input event occurs. To use this function,  
[Upload] > [E-mail Notification] must also be set  
Set the end time of the timer event in the 24-hour  
format.  
(4) [Repeat Interval]  
Select [1 sec.] [5 sec.] [10 sec.] [30 sec.] [1 min.] [5 min.]  
[10 min.] [15 min. ] [20 min.] [30 min.] [1 hour] [3 hours]  
[6 hours] or [12 hours] for the timer event repeat intervals.  
Select [None] if an operation need not be repeated.  
(9) [External Device Output for Active Event]  
Select whether external device output is active or  
inactive upon an active event. Select [Disable] to  
disable external device output.  
(5) [Video Record]  
Specify the video record action. When [Enable] is  
selected, video will be transmitted to the destination  
selected in [Video Record Action] (p. 56) when a timer  
event occurs.  
(10)[External Device Output for Inactive Event]  
Select whether external device output is active or  
inactive upon an inactive event. Select [Disable] to  
disable external device output.  
(6) [E-mail Notification]  
Select the e-mail notification operation to be  
performed. If [Enable] is selected, e-mail notification  
is performed when a timer event occurs. To use this  
function, [Upload] > [E-mail Notification] must also be  
set (p. 53).  
(11)[Day/Night Mode Switching]  
Select the Day/Night Mode switching behavior when  
an external device input event is triggered.  
When [Switch to Day Mode] is selected, switches to  
Day Mode when an active event is triggered, and  
switches to Night Mode when an inactive event is  
triggered.  
When [Switch to Night Mode] is selected, switches to  
Night Mode when an active event is triggered, and  
switches to Day Mode when an inactive event is  
triggered.  
(7) [External Device Output]  
Select whether external device output is active or  
inactive when a timer event occurs. Select [Disable] to  
disable output to an external device.  
(8) [Day/Night Mode Switching]  
Select the Day/Night Mode switching behavior when a  
timer event is triggered.  
Select [Disable] to disable Day/Night Mode switching.  
Select [Switch to Day Mode] to switch to Day Mode at  
the start time, and Night Mode at the end time.  
Select [Switch to Night Mode] to switch to Night Mode  
at the start time, and Day Mode at the end time.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
[Event] Setting Video Record, Volume Detection, External Device Output/Input and Timer  
Select [Disable] to disable Day/Night Mode switching.  
Important  
• [Day/Night Mode Switching] can only be set in [Timer 1].  
• [External Device Output] and [Day/Night Mode Switching] do  
not support [Repeat Interval].  
4
• When [Day/Night] in the Admin Viewer is set to [Auto], Day/  
Night Mode switching will not happen when a timer event is  
triggered (p. 137).  
• If the [Day/Night Mode Switching] settings switch Day/Night  
Mode while the Admin Viewer/VB Viewer is assigned camera  
control, control will be released.  
Note  
When using timers that run continuously for 24 hours with a  
[Repeat Interval] of 30 seconds or less, set the timer start and  
end times so the timers can run continuously.  
Example:  
Timer  
[Start Time]  
[End Time]  
[Repeat Interval]  
[Timer 1]  
[Timer 2]  
0:00  
12:00  
10 sec  
12:00  
0:00  
10 sec  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[Access Control] Setting User Access Privileges  
Note  
The following can be set here.  
Authorized users have higher authorities than guest users.  
Authorized User Account  
Register who can access this camera.  
User Authority  
Set the authorities for authorized users and guest  
users.  
IPv4 Host Access Restrictions  
IPv4 Host Access Restrictions  
Specify the hosts from which IPv4 access is  
permitted and restricted.  
IPv6 Host Access Restrictions  
Specify the hosts from which IPv6 access is  
permitted and restricted.  
Authorized User Account  
(1) [Apply Host Access Restrictions]  
Set IPv4 host access restrictions to [Disable] or  
[Enable].  
(2) [Default Policy]  
(1) [User Name], [Password]  
If IPv4 host access restrictions are applied, select  
[Authorize Access] or [Prohibit Access] for the default  
policy.  
Enter the user name and password and then click  
[Add]. The authorized user will be added to the user  
list.  
The user name can consist of up to 15 (single-byte)  
characters using A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, “-” (hyphen) and  
“_” (underscore).  
(3) [Network Address / Subnet]  
Create a list of permitted hosts and restricted hosts  
and set IPv4 address access for each host to [Yes] or  
[No].  
The password can consist of 6 to15 (single-byte)  
ASCII characters (space or printable characters).  
You can specify the subnet and set access  
restrictions by network or host.  
If access is prohibited, access to all ports is  
restricted.  
(2) [User List]  
A list of authorized users is shown. User authorities  
can be set for these users. Up to 50 users can be  
registered in addition to the Administrator (root).  
Also, the user list can be sorted using the S T  
buttons on the right.  
Important  
• To prohibit access via a proxy server in HTTP connection, a  
proxy server address must be set.  
To delete a user, select the applicable user from the  
user list and then click [Delete].  
• If host access restriction is set mistakenly, access to the  
setting pages themselves may be prohibited, in which case  
restoring the factory default settings will become the only  
means for recovery.  
User Authority  
Note  
If the same address is duplicated, the policy for the address that  
appears highest on the list will be applied.  
[Privileged Camera Control], [Camera Control], [Video  
Distribution], [Audio Distribution]  
Set the user authorities of authorized users and guest  
users. Select the checkboxes corresponding to the  
items you want to permit for each user.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
[Access Control] Setting User Access Privileges  
IPv6 Host Access Restrictions  
4
(1) [Apply Host Access Restrictions]  
Set IPv6 host access restrictions to [Disable] or  
[Enable].  
(2) [Default Policy]  
If IPv6 host access restrictions are applied, select  
[Authorize Access] or [Prohibit Access] for the default  
policy.  
(3) [Prefix / Prefix Length]  
Create a list of permitted hosts and restricted hosts  
and set IPv6 address access for each host to [Yes] or  
[No].  
You can specify the prefix length and set access  
restriction by network or host.  
If access is prohibited, access to all ports is  
restricted.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
[IPsec] Setting IPsec  
(6) [DH Group]  
Select [Group 2] or [Group 2->Group 1] for the key  
The following can be set here.  
IPsec  
generation information that will be used in the DH  
algorithm for key exchange via auto key exchange  
protocol IKE.  
Set the IPsec setting method.  
Auto Key Exchange Settings  
Set auto key exchange.  
(7) [ISAKMP SA Validity Period (min)]  
Set the duration of validity for ISAKMP SA (factory  
default setting is [480]).  
IPsec Set  
IP security can be specified through auto key  
exchange or manual setting with up to five  
communicating devices.  
IPsec Set (Auto Key Exchange)  
IPsec Sets 1 to 5 are available, and you can specify IPsec  
settings for one communication device for each IPsec Set.  
IPsec  
(1) [IPsec]  
Key settings for use with IPsec can be selected as  
[Auto Key Exchange] or [Manual].  
Auto Key Exchange Settings  
(1) [IPsec Set]  
Set IPsec Set to [Disable], [Enable in IPv4] or [Enable  
in IPv6].  
(2) [IPsec Mode]  
Set IPsec mode to [Tunnel Mode] or [Transport  
Mode].  
(3) [Destination IPv4 Address], [Destination IPv6 Address]  
(1) [IPsec SA Encryption Algorithm]  
Enter the IP address of the connection destination.  
Set the IPsec SA encryption algorithm to [AES-  
>3DES], [AES->3DES->DES] or [AES->3DES->DES-  
>NULL].  
The specified algorithm will be checked for an  
applicable encryption algorithm starting from the left.  
(4) [Source IPv4 Address], [Source IPv6 Address]  
Enter the IP address of the source.  
(5) [Security Protocol]  
Set the IPsec protocol to [ESP], [AH] or [ESP and AH].  
If [ESP] is selected, enter only the setting items  
relating to ESP.  
If [AH] is selected, enter only the setting items relating  
to AH.  
(2) [IPsec SA Authentication Algorithm]  
Set the IPsec SA authentication algorithm to  
[HMAC_SHA1_96] or [HMAC_SHA1_96->  
HMAC_MD5_96].  
The specified algorithm will be checked for an  
applicable authentication algorithm starting from the  
left.  
If [ESP and AH] is selected, enter all setting items.  
(6) [Security Gateway IPv4 Address], [Security Gateway  
IPv6 Address]  
(3) [IPsec SA Validity Period (min)]  
Set the duration of validity for IPsec SA (factory default  
setting is [480]).  
If IPsec mode is set to [Tunnel Mode] in (2), set the IP  
address of the security gateway.  
(7) [Destination Subnet Mask Length] (IPv4), [Destination  
Prefix Length] (IPv6)  
(4) [ISAKMP SA Encryption Algorithm]  
Set the SA encryption algorithm for use with auto key  
exchange protocol IKE to [AES->3DES] or [AES->  
3DES->DES].  
This setting is required only if IPsec mode is set to  
[Tunnel Mode] in (2).  
If IPv6 is used, enter a desired prefix length for the  
connection destination in the range of 16 to 128.  
If IPv4 is used, enter a desired length in the range of 1  
to 32.  
(5) [ISAKMP SA Authentication Algorithm]  
Set the SA authentication algorithm for use with auto  
key exchange protocol IKE to [SHA1] or [SHA1-  
>MD5].  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
[IPsec] Setting IPsec  
(8) [IKE Pre-Shared Key]  
(7) [Destination Subnet Mask Length] (IPv4), [Destination  
Prefix Length] (IPv6)  
Enter the pre-shared key for IKE (auto key exchange)  
(up to 127 characters).  
This setting is required only if [IPsec Mode] is set to  
[Tunnel Mode] in (2).  
If IPv6 is used, enter a desired prefix length for the  
connection destination in the range of 16 to 128.  
If IPv4 is used, enter a desired length in the range of 1  
to 32.  
Important  
If the camera is rebooted during auto key exchange  
communication, a connection error may result after rebooting.  
In this case, connect again.  
4
z If [Security Protocol] is set to [ESP] or [ESP and AH] in  
(5), (8) [SA ESP Encryption Algorithm] to (15) [SA ESP  
SPI (inbound)] must be set.  
Note  
If auto key exchange is used, it will take approximately 5 to 10  
seconds before communication with the camera starts.  
(8) [SA ESP Encryption Algorithm]  
Set the ESP encryption algorithm to [AES], [3DES],  
[DES] or [NULL] according to the encryption  
algorithm supported by the device to connect to.  
Normally [AES] or [3DES] is recommended.  
IPsec Set (Manual)  
IPsec Sets 1 to 5 are available, and you can specify IPsec  
settings for one communication device for each IPsec Set.  
(9) [SA ESP Authentication Algorithm]  
Set the ESP authentication algorithm to  
[HMAC_SHA1_96], [HMAC_MD5_96] or [No  
Authentication] according to the authentication  
algorithm supported by the device to connect to.  
If [ESP] is used alone, [No Authentication] cannot be  
selected.  
(10)[SA ESP Encryption Key (outbound)]  
Set the SA encryption key for outbound. If [AES],  
[3DES] or [DES] was selected in (8), set a 128-bit,  
192-bit or 64-bit hexadecimal, respectively. This item  
need not be set if [NULL] was selected.  
(11)[SA ESP Authentication Key (outbound)]  
Set the SA authentication key for outbound. If  
[HMAC_SHA1_96] or [HMAC_MD5_96] was selected  
in (9), set a 160-bit or 128-bit hexadecimal,  
respectively. This item need not be set if [No  
Authentication] was selected.  
(1) [IPsec Set]  
Set IPsec Set to [Disable], [Enable in IPv4] or [Enable  
in IPv6].  
(12)[SA ESP SPI (outbound)]  
Set the SA SPI value for outbound.  
Set a desired value in the range of 256 to  
4294967295.  
(2) [IPsec Mode]  
Set IPsec mode to [Tunnel Mode] or [Transport  
Mode].  
(3) [Destination IPv4 Address], [Destination IPv6 Address]  
(13)[SA ESP Encryption Key (inbound)]  
Enter the IP address of the connection destination.  
Set the SA encryption key for inbound.  
(4) [Source IPv4 Address], [Source IPv6 Address]  
If [AES], [3DES] or [DES] was selected in (8), set a  
128-bit, 192-bit or 64-bit hexadecimal, respectively.  
This item need not be set if [NULL] was selected.  
Enter the IP address of the source.  
(5) [Security Protocol]  
Set the IPsec protocol to [ESP], [AH] or [ESP and AH].  
If [ESP] is selected, enter only the setting items  
relating to ESP.  
If [AH] is selected, enter only the setting items relating  
to AH.  
(14)[SA ESP Authentication Key (inbound)]  
Set the SA authentication key for inbound.  
If [HMAC_SHA1_96] or [HMAC_MD5_96] was  
selected in (9), set a 160-bit or 128-bit hexadecimal,  
respectively. This item need not be set if [No  
Authentication] was selected.  
If [ESP and AH] is selected, enter all setting items.  
(6) [Security Gateway IPv4 Address], [Security Gateway  
IPv6 Address]  
(15)[SA ESP SPI (inbound)]  
Set the SA SPI value for inbound.  
Set a desired value in the range of 256 to  
4294967295. Since this setting is used as an ID for  
If [IPsec Mode] is set to [Tunnel Mode] in (2), set the  
IP address of the security gateway.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
identifying the SA, be careful not to specify an  
inbound SPI whose value is already used in the SPI for  
other ESP.  
z If [Security Protocol] was set to [AH] or [ESP and AH] in  
(5), (16) [SA AH Authentication Algorithm] to (20) [SA  
AH SPI (inbound)] must be set.  
(16)[SA AH Authentication Algorithm]  
Set the AH authentication algorithm to  
[HMAC_SHA1_96] or [HMAC_MD5_96] according to  
the authentication algorithm supported by the device  
to connect to.  
(17)[SA AH Authentication Key (outbound)]  
Set the SA authentication key for outbound. If  
[HMAC_SHA1_96] or [HMAC_MD5_96] was selected  
in (16), set a 160-bit or 128-bit hexadecimal,  
respectively.  
(18)[SA AH SPI (outbound)]  
Set the SA SPI value for outbound.  
Set a desired value in the range of 256 to  
4294967295.  
(19)[SA AH Authentication Key (inbound)]  
Set the SA authentication key for inbound. If  
[HMAC_SHA1_96] or [HMAC_MD5_96] was selected  
in (16), set a 160-bit or 128-bit hexadecimal,  
respectively.  
(20)[SA AH SPI (inbound)]  
Set the SA SPI value for inbound.  
Set a desired value in the range of 256 to  
4294967295. Since this setting is used as an ID for  
identifying the SA, be careful not to specify an  
inbound SPI whose value is already used in the SPI for  
another AH.  
Important  
• To run this camera with IPsec, the communicating devices  
and network must be set beforehand. Contact your System  
Administrator for these settings.  
• When connecting with IPsec, set the camera IP address  
manually.  
For IPv4 addresses, use addresses set with [Network] >  
[IPv4 Address Setting Method] > [Manual].  
For IPv6 addresses, use addresses set with [Network] >  
[IPv6 Address (Manual)].  
• If any setting is changed from the [IPsec] menu, the camera  
may become inaccessible from the active web browser.  
Check beforehand the precautions in “Important” in “[Reboot  
Note  
If IPsec is used, video transmission performance drops.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[SSL/TLS] Setting HTTP Communication Encryption  
The following can be set here.  
Important  
Certificates  
Create an SSL/TLS certificate.  
With regard to security, it is recommended that you use a self-  
signed certificate where complete security does not need to be  
ensured through operation tests, etc. For system operation,  
acquire and install a certificate issued by a CA.  
4
Certificate Management  
Manage the SSL/TLS certificate.  
Encrypted Communications  
Set the encrypted communication.  
Certificate Management  
Certificates  
(1) [Generate Certificate Signing Request]  
Click [Exec] to create server private key and generate  
a certificate signing request. Once processed, the  
certificate signing request will appear in a separate  
window.  
(1) [Create Self-Signed Certificate]  
After entering each of the following settings, click  
[Exec] to create a self-signed certificate. Follow the  
instructions in the message and reboot. The certificate  
created will take effect after rebooting.  
Note  
Generating a certificate signing request takes time, so it is  
recommended that you stop video transmission and upload  
processes.  
Note  
(2) [Display Certificate Signing Request]  
Click [Exec] to view the details of the certificate  
signing request.  
Creating a certificate takes time, so it is recommended that you  
stop video transmission and upload processes.  
(2) [Certificate Status]  
If no certificate is installed, [Not Installed] will appear.  
If a certificate is installed, the validity period for the  
certificate will appear.  
(3) [Install Server Certificate]  
Perform this operation to install a server certificate.  
Click [Browse] to select the certificate file for  
installation, then click [Exec]. The certificate installed  
will take effect after rebooting.  
(3) [Country (C)]  
Enter the country code.  
(4) [Install Intermediate Certificate]  
(4) [State/Province (ST)], [Locality (L)], [Organization (O)],  
[Organizational Unit (OU)], [Common Name (CN)]  
Enter state/province name, locality, organization  
name, organizational unit and common name in ASCII  
characters (spaces or printable characters). Enter a  
FQDN format host name, etc. to set the common  
name (required).  
Perform this operation to install an intermediate  
certificate. Select the certificate file to be installed  
using [Browse] and click [Exec]. The installed  
certificate will take effect after rebooting.  
Note  
To install an intermediate certificate and a primary intermediate  
certificate, use a text editor or similar software to place them in  
the same file and install them as an intermediate certificate.  
(5) [Validity Period Start Date], [Validity Period End Date]  
Set the validity period of the certificate to be created in  
the range of 2001/01/01 to 2031/12/31 (required when  
creating a self-signed certificate).  
(5) [Delete Certificate]  
Click [Exec] to delete the certificate. However, if SSL  
communications are enabled, the certificate cannot  
be deleted. Set [SSL Communications] to [Disable]  
before deleting a certificate. The deletion will take  
effect after rebooting.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
(6) [Display Server Certificate Details]  
Click [Exec] to view the details of the certificate.  
(7) [Display Self CA Certificate]  
Used for the purpose of testing SSL communications,  
but otherwise not normally used.  
(8) [Backup]  
Click [Exec] to perform a backup of the certificates  
and private key. This operation can only be performed  
via SSL communications.  
(9) [Restore]  
Installs the certificates and private key from  
backup. Click [Browse] to select the backup file,  
then click [Exec]. This operation can only be  
performed via SSL communications, and will take  
effect after rebooting.  
Encrypted Communications  
(1) [SSL Communications]  
Set SSL communications to [Disable] or [Enable]. The  
setting will take effect after rebooting.  
However, if no certificate is installed, SSL  
communications cannot be changed to [Enable].  
Note  
• It may take a few minutes to generate an SSL key.  
• If SSL communications are used, video transmission  
performance drops.  
• Depending on the type of the certificate being installed on the  
camera, a dialog box may appear indicating that the web  
browser has accepted the certificate and a connection can be  
made.  
If the dialog box does not appear, register the CA certificate in  
the web browser.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[802.1X] Network Port Authentication Settings  
Certificate Information  
The following can be set here.  
802.1X Authentication  
Display the 802.1X authentication enable/disable  
control and status.  
4
This is displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set  
to [EAP-TLS], [EAP-TTLS], or [EAP-PEAP].  
Authentication Method  
Set the authentication method used for 802.1X  
authentication.  
(1) [CA Certificate Status]  
If no CA certificate is installed, [Not Installed] is  
displayed. If a CA certificate is installed, the validity  
period of the certificated is displayed.  
Certificate Information  
Display the certificate used for 802.1X  
authentication and the private key installation  
status.  
(2) [Client Certificate Status]  
If no client certificate is installed, [Not Installed] is  
displayed. If a client certificate is installed, the validity  
period of the certificated is displayed. This is  
displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set to  
[EAP-TLS].  
Certificate Management  
Manage the certificates and private keys used for  
802.1X authentication.  
(3) [Client Private Key Status]  
802.1X Authentication  
If no client private key is installed, [Not Installed] is  
displayed. If a client private key is installed, [Installed]  
is displayed. This is displayed only when  
[Authentication Method] is set to [EAP-TLS].  
(1) [802.1X Authentication]  
Set 802.1X authentication to [Disable] or [Enable].  
Initially, if [802.1X Authentication] in [802.1X] is set to  
[Enable] and [Apply] clicked, [Before changing the  
setting, set 802.1X authentication to “Disable”. ] will  
be displayed, and input for setting changes,  
certificate installation/deletion, etc. will be unavailable.  
To change settings, first set [802.1X Authentication] to  
[Disable] and click [Apply]. Settings input will be  
activated. Make any appropriate settings, set [802.1X  
Authentication] to [Enable] and click [Apply].  
Certificate Management  
This is displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set  
to [EAP-TLS], [EAP-TTLS], or [EAP-PEAP].  
(1) [Install CA Certificate]  
Installs a CA certificate. Select the certificate file to be  
installed using [Browse] and click [Exec].  
(2) [Authentication Status]  
Display the status of 802.1X authentication. There are  
three types of status: [Authenticated],  
[Unauthenticated], and [Stop].  
(2) [Install Client Certificate]  
Installs a client certificate. Select the certificate file to  
be installed using [Browse] and click [Exec]. This is  
displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set to  
[EAP-TLS].  
Authentication Method  
(3) [Install Client Private Key]  
Installs a client private key. Select the private key file  
to be installed using [Browse] and click [Exec]. This is  
displayed only when [Authentication Method] is set to  
[EAP-TLS].  
(1) [Authentication Method]  
Select from [EAP-MD5], [EAP-TLS], [EAP-TTLS], and  
[EAP-PEAP] for the 802.1X authentication method.  
(4) [Client Private Key Password]  
(2) [User Name]  
Enter the password for the client private key. Required  
when a password has been configured for the private  
key. This is displayed only when [Authentication  
Method] is set to [EAP-TLS].  
Enter the user name used for authentication.  
(3) [Password]  
Enter the required password for authentication.  
This is displayed only when [Authentication Method] is  
set to [EAP-MD5], [EAP-TTLS], or [EAP-PEAP].  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
(5) [Delete Certificate]  
Deletes all installed CA certificates, client certificates,  
and client private keys.  
Only “CA Certificate” is displayed when [Authentication  
Method] is set to [EAP-TTLS] or [EAP-PEAP], but any  
installed client certificates and client private keys are also  
deleted.  
Important  
• If any CA certificates, client certificates, and client private  
keys already exist, they are discarded and new versions are  
installed.  
• An error occurs if the format of the certificate or private key to  
be installed is incorrect.  
• Client certificates and client private keys are checked as a  
pair when installing, and an error occurs if they do not match.  
• The certificate and private key used for 802.1X authentication  
must be installed as separate items, irrespective of the  
installation status of certificates for SSL/TLS.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[Memory Card] Memory Card Operations and Settings  
Note  
The following can be set here.  
• When [JPEG] is selected in [Video Format] and an upload error  
occurs, the frame rate of video recorded in JPEG format is  
always 1 fps.  
Memory Card Operations  
Perform memory card operations.  
4
Memory Card Information  
Display information about the memory card.  
• When a network error occurs during recording-mode stream,  
video is saved in the JPEG format regardless of the [Video  
Format] setting (the frame rate is fixed at 1 fps).  
• Video size and quality of the recorded video are made  
according to the settings in the [Video] menu.  
Memory Card Operations (unmount status)  
(4) [Pre-event Buffer (number of frames)] / [Pre-event  
Buffer (sec)]  
Enter the number of frames or seconds of video to be  
buffered before the event. The maximum amount is  
number of frames for a [JPEG] selection and number  
of seconds for an [H.264(1)] selection in [Video  
Format].  
(1) [Mount/Unmount]  
In unmount status, [Mount] will appear. Click [Mount]  
to mount the memory card.  
(5) [Post-event Buffer (number of frames)] / [Post-event  
Buffer (sec)]  
Note  
Enter the number of frames or seconds of video to be  
buffered after the event. The maximum amount is  
number of frames for a [JPEG] selection and number  
of seconds for an [H.264(1)] selection in [Video  
Format].  
microSD, microSDHC, and microSDXC memory cards can be  
used with the camera.  
When a memory card is inserted in the card slot, it is mounted  
automatically. It is also mounted automatically if inserted in the  
camera at the time of booting.  
(6) [Overwrite videos]  
For inserting and removing the memory card, see “Installation  
Guide” > “Using a Memory Card”.  
Select [Enable] or [Disable] for the overwrite setting of  
video that is recorded to a memory card when an  
event occurs. If you select [Enable], videos recorded  
using an event and timer will be overwritten.  
Overwriting is performed when the number of  
recordings that can be stored (100,000 files) for each  
of events and timers is exceeded. Overwriting is not  
performed when there is insufficient space on the  
memory card.  
(2) [Operation Settings]  
Set write operations to the memory card to [Save Log]  
or [Save Logs and Videos].  
Note  
• The following settings and operations will record video on a  
memory card.  
- When a network error occurs during recording-mode stream  
- When uploading fails  
- When [Video Record Action] in the [Event] menu (p. 56) is  
set to [Record to Memory Card], and an event (volume  
detection, external device input or timer) setting is enabled  
and [Enable] is selected for [Video Record]  
- When video is recorded due to an intelligent function event  
Important  
• When an H.264 video is saved to a memory card, the  
following restrictions apply to [H.264(1)] of [Video] (p. 46).  
- Only [Use bit rate control] can be selected for [Bit Rate  
Control].  
- Only [3072] or less can be selected for [Target Bit Rate  
(kbps)].  
- When manually recorded to memory card from the Admin  
- Only one of [0.5], [1], and [1.5] can be selected for [I  
Frame Interval (sec)].  
• New files cannot be saved to the memory card if there is no free  
space.  
• Since the [Pre-event Buffer] and [Post-event Buffer] set the  
maximum value, it may not be possible to record the  
specified number of frames or seconds of video depending  
on conditions.  
(3) [Video Format]  
Select the [JPEG] or [H.264(1)] video format to make  
recordings to a memory card. Video is recorded with  
the settings defined under [Video] > [H.264(1)] (p. 46).  
[H.264(2)] cannot be used. Video is recorded in this  
format when [Record to Memory Card] is selected in  
[Event] > [Video Record Action] (p. 56).  
(7) [Format]  
Click [Exec] to format the memory card. Formatting  
erases all video and logs on the memory card.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Memory Card Operations (mount status)  
Memory Card Information  
(1) [Memory Card Recognition]  
Displays the status of the memory card. The three  
status messages are [Memory Card Not Inserted],  
[Not Mounted] and [Mounted].  
(1) [Mount/Unmount]  
In mount status, [Unmount] will appear. Click  
[Unmount] to unmount the memory card.  
(2) [Memory Card Operation Status]  
Displays the operation status of the memory card. The  
three status messages are as follows.  
• [Operable]: This status indicates that any operation  
may be performed.  
Important  
Be sure to perform the unmount process when turning off the  
power to the camera or removing the memory card. Failing to  
unmount first may result in management file problems or the  
memory card becoming inaccessible.  
You can use the Memory Card Unmount Tool (p. 15) to mount/  
unmount memory cards from multiple cameras at the same  
time.  
• [Recreating video management information]: This  
status indicates that video management information  
is being recreated. Other operations cannot be  
performed.  
• [Deleting videos]: This status indicates that videos  
are being deleted. Other operations cannot be  
performed.  
(2) [Operation Settings], [Video Format], [Pre-event  
Buffer], [Post-event Buffer], [Overwrite videos]  
These settings are the same as in “Memory Card  
Operations (unmount status)”.  
(3) [Video Management Information Status]  
Displays the status of the video management  
information. The two status messages are as follows.  
• [Normal]: This status indicates that video  
management information is normal.  
(3) [Delete Videos]  
Click [Exec] to delete videos from the memory card.  
During deletion, an indicator will appear to the right of  
[Exec].  
• [Video Management Information Recreation  
Required]: This status indicates that management  
files are corrupted or not consistent with saved  
video files. It is necessary to click [Exec] in  
[Recreate Video Management Information] to  
recreate video management information.  
Note  
• It may take 40 minutes or more to delete videos from the  
memory card.  
• Deleting videos takes time, so it is recommended that you stop  
video transmission and upload processes.  
(4) [Video Saving]  
Displays whether or not videos can be saved to the  
memory card.  
• [Can Save]: Indicates that videos can be saved to  
the memory card.  
• [Cannot Save]: Indicates that videos cannot be  
saved to the memory card. This status may be  
caused when the memory card is not mounted, the  
video file count upper limit has been reached, the  
video management file is corrupted or the card is  
write-protected.  
(4) [Recreate Video Management Information]  
Click [Exec] to recreate the video management  
information.  
During re-creation, an indicator will appear to the right  
of [Exec]. The memory card is inaccessible during this  
time.  
Note  
• It may take 90 minutes or more to recreate video management  
information.  
• Recreating video management information takes time, so it is  
recommended that you stop video transmission and upload  
processes.  
(5) [Memory Card Capacity (KB)]  
Displays the memory card storage capacity.  
(6) [Used Capacity (KB)]  
Displays information about storage used on the  
memory card.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
[Memory Card] Memory Card Operations and Settings  
Important  
Information recorded to the memory card may be regarded as  
“personal information”. Take sufficient precautions for handling  
this information when releasing to third parties for disposal,  
transfer or repair.  
4
Note  
For accessing files saved to the memory card, see “Memory Card  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[Reboot Item] Setting Items Requiring Rebooting  
The following settings that require rebooting before  
changes take effect can be found on a single page.  
LAN, IPv4, IPv6, HTTP Server  
(1) [LAN]  
LAN interface, maximum packet size settings (p. 37)  
(2) [IPv4]  
IP address, IPv4 settings, etc. (p. 37)  
(3) [IPv6]  
Settings regarding IPv6 (p. 38)  
(4) [HTTP Server]  
Authentication method, HTTP, and HTTPS port  
settings (p. 55)  
Important  
These settings relate to network connectivity. If any setting is  
changed to a value that may disable camera connection from  
the active web browser, a dialog box appears and alerts the  
user.  
Click [OK] to apply the new setting.  
Depending on the new setting, it may not be possible to  
connect to the camera again after rebooting. If this happens, a  
candidate URI for reconnecting the camera will appear if  
available.  
Try the URI displayed to reconnect the camera.  
If you cannot connect to the camera through the displayed URI,  
contact your System Administrator.  
* Settings related to network connectivity in the [Reboot Item] menu  
are [LAN Interface], [Maximum Packet Size], [IPv4 Address  
Setting Method], [IPv4 Address], [Subnet Mask], [IPv6], [Auto  
(RA)], [Auto (DHCPv6)], [IPv6 Address (Manual)], [Prefix Length],  
[HTTP Port] and [HTTPS Port].  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
[Maintenance]  
Viewing Current Settings, Event Logs and Performing Maintenance  
The IP address, SSL or 802.1X certificates, and  
private key files are also backed up.  
The following items can be used here.  
4
Device Information  
Display information about the current device.  
(6) [Restore Settings]  
Restore all settings, other than the date and time, from  
a backup file on a memory card.  
Tool  
Display or Initialize Camera Settings  
The IP address, SSL or 802.1X certificates, and  
private key files are also restored.  
The camera reboots after settings are restored.  
Device Information  
Caution  
You must not turn off the camera while it is  
performing the [Restore Default Settings], [Back  
Up Settings] or [Restore Settings] operation.  
Turning off the camera at this stage may result in  
making it unable to boot correctly.  
[Model Name], [Firmware Version], [Serial Number], [Build  
Number], [MAC address]  
Displays information about the currently connected  
camera.  
Important  
If the restored settings were backed up from a different camera,  
note that an address conflict on the network may occur.  
Tool  
Note  
• It is recommended that you write down all current setting  
values before restoring factory default settings in [Restore  
Default Settings] (p. 161).  
(1) [View Logs]  
• The camera can be restored to factory default settings using  
the reset switch as well. Note, however, that this will reset all  
camera settings to factory default settings except for date and  
time (p. 160).  
Display a history of camera operations and  
connections to each viewer, etc.  
(2) [View Current Settings]  
Display a list of current settings.  
(3) [Reboot]  
The camera is rebooted.  
The camera angle will return to the home position. If a  
home position has not been registered, the camera  
will return to the factory default home position setting.  
See p. 92 for details on registering a home position.  
(4) [Restore Default Settings]  
Except for the following items, all user-defined  
settings will be discarded and restored to factory  
default settings after the camera is rebooted.  
– Network administrator password, LAN, IPv4, IPv6  
– Date and time  
– Host access restrictions for access control  
– SSL/TLS  
– 802.1X  
(5) [Back Up Settings]  
Back up all settings, other than the date and time, to a  
memory card.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
[Camera Angle] Digital Zoom Settings  
If the zoom or [Image Flip] settings have been  
changed, be sure to save the settings in the camera  
using the [Save settings] button.  
The following can be set here.  
Zoom operations  
Operate the digital zoom function.  
(8) [Restore settings]  
Image Flip  
Flip the video image vertically.  
Discard the settings you have specified and restore  
the settings saved in the camera.  
Control for Admin  
Note  
Set the exposure compensation.  
• [Camera Angle] can be operated from the Setting menu only  
on the VB-S800D/VB-S900F. It cannot be operated from Admin  
Viewer or VB Viewer.  
(1)  
(2)  
• Connecting to the camera from the [Camera Angle] menu will  
disconnect connections from each type of viewer and  
recording software that are not connected via RTP.  
(3)  
(4)  
• The higher the digital zoom ratio, the lower the video quality  
becomes.  
• Revise the following settings after saving the [Camera Angle]  
settings.  
- Privacy mask settings  
- Preset settings  
- Intelligent function settings  
(5)  
(6)  
• [Camera Angle] supports connection to a single camera for up  
to 30 minutes.  
(8)  
(1) Video Display Area  
(7)  
Setting the Exposure Compensation  
You can set any of nine levels of video brightness.  
Displays video currently captured by the camera.  
(2) [Resize] button  
Each time this button is clicked, the screen size of the  
video display area switches between “480 x 270” and  
“960 x 540”.  
(3) [Reconnect] button  
The camera is reconnected.  
To darken the video, drag the slider toward [Dark]. To  
brighten the video, drag the slider toward [Bright].  
(4) [Zoom] slider, [Zoom] buttons  
These control the digital zoom ratio.  
Note  
The [Zoom] slider zooms in (telephoto) by moving the  
knob upwards or zooms out (wide-angle) by moving  
the knob downwards.  
• The exposure compensation value set by [Camera Angle] is  
not reflected under [Camera] > [Initial Camera Settings] >  
[Exposure Compensation] (p. 42).  
The [Zoom] buttons zoom in or out continuously while  
pressed, and stop when released.  
• After [Exposure] is set to [Manual] and adjusted in Admin  
Viewer (p. 135), [Exposure] is automatically reset to [Auto].  
(5) [Control for Admin] button  
This button displays the [Exposure Compensation]  
slider.  
(6) [Image Flip] selection box  
Select the orientation of the camera video. If [Enable]  
is selected, the video is displayed rotated by 180  
degrees.  
(7) [Save settings]  
Save the current zoom and [Image Flip] settings in the  
camera.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Chapter  
5
Admin Tools  
Privacy Mask Setting  
Panorama Image Registration  
View Restriction Setting  
Camera Preset Setting  
Intelligent Function Setting  
Viewing Logs  
Managing Memory Card Video  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Admin Tools Overview  
Admin Tools consists of applications for remotely making camera settings, checking operating conditions, and acquiring logs.  
(p. 78)  
(p. 83)  
Admin Tools  
Panorama Creation Tool  
This is the top page of Admin Tools. All tools can be  
launched from this page.  
A panorama image creation tool that shows the entire  
area that can be captured by this camera. Once a  
panorama image is captured and registered, it is shown in  
the panorama display panel of the viewer. As the  
panorama image is also shown when view restrictions and  
presets are set, you can see at a glance which part of the  
entire area the set area is occupying.  
(p. 79)  
Privacy Mask Setting Tool  
View Restriction Setting Tool (p. 86)  
A tool that lets you hide areas you do not want to be seen  
by setting privacy masks. Up to eight areas can be  
masked, allowing thorough protection of privacy.  
The View Restriction Tool restricts the viewable capture  
range in the VB Viewer. You can set the desired range  
with the mouse by referring to the preview in panorama  
mode.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Admin Tools Overview  
(p. 90)  
Preset Setting Tool  
Log Viewer  
A tool that lets you set presets and the home position  
visually. You can make the desired settings with the  
mouse by referring to the preview in panorama or full  
video mode.  
This viewer shows the logs of operating conditions of the  
camera.  
5
Note  
Intelligent Function Setting Tool (p. 97)  
On the control panel of Windows, the decimal point in a value is  
always indicated by “.” regardless of the settings of [Region and  
Language]. Also, the date is shown in the “yyyy/mm/dd” or “mm/  
dd” format, while the time is shown in the “hh:mm:ss” format. (y,  
m, d, h, m, and s indicate year, month, day, hour, minute, and  
second, respectively)  
This tool is used to set intelligent functions that perform  
uploads, notify the viewer, record a log, etc., if a change  
has occurred in the captured video due to movement of a  
subject. By setting the conditions, you can let the camera  
detect events such as “moving object”, “abandoned  
object”, “removed object”, “camera tampering”,  
“passing”. You can view the video on the camera while  
setting the position and size of the detection area and line,  
detection conditions, etc.  
Recorded Video Utility  
This is a utility for browsing and managing video recorded  
on memory cards inserted in the camera. You can display  
a list of recorded video, play it back, delete it and  
download it.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Accessing the Admin Tools  
• In environments without a proxy server, select [Internet  
options] > [Connections] tab > [LAN settings] and clear the  
[Automatically detect settings] checkbox in Internet Explorer.  
Launching the Admin Tools  
The Admin Tools can be launched from the top page of  
the camera.  
Start the top page of the camera (p. 32).  
1
Click [Admin Tools].  
2
A user authentication window appears.  
Enter a user name and password and click [OK]  
3
The Admin Tools top page will appear.  
(3)  
(1)  
(2)  
(4)  
(1) [Admin Viewer]  
Click to launch Admin Viewer.  
(2) [Setting Page]  
Click to launch Setting Menu.  
(3) [Back to top]  
Click this button to navigate to the top page.  
(4) [Admin Tools]  
Click the buttons of any tool to launch Admin Tools.  
Important  
The Admin Tools Certificate must be installed on any computers  
using [Admin Tools]. (p. 26)  
Note  
• The first time you launch any of the Admin Tools, wait about 5  
to 10 seconds until the software is downloaded to your  
computer. From then on, launching will be quicker. Also, when  
accessing via SSL encrypted communication, download time  
will take longer (about 20 to 30 seconds).  
• None of the following tools can be launched concurrently:  
Privacy Mask Setting Tool, Panorama Creation Tool, View  
Restriction Setting Tool, Preset Setting Tool and Intelligent  
Function Setting Tool.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Privacy Mask Setting Tool  
A tool that lets you cover certain areas on the camera video with privacy masks.  
When the camera is panned, tilted, or zoomed, the privacy mask area responds to the camera video.  
You can set privacy masks  
for up to eight areas while  
checking the video on the  
camera.  
5
Display Screen of Privacy Mask Setting Tool  
(1)  
(2) (3)  
(7)  
(8)  
(9)  
(10)  
(11)  
(12)  
(13)  
(14)-1  
(14)-2  
(14)  
(14)-3  
(14)-4  
(14)-5  
(6) (5)(4)  
(15)  
(16)  
(1) Video Display Area  
When the button is set to  
be performed.  
, pan/tilt operations can  
The video currently captured by the camera is shown.  
Privacy masks can be resized/moved in the video  
display area.  
(3) [Switch Screen Size] button  
Each time this button is clicked, the screen size of the  
video display area switches between “480 x 270” and  
“960 x 540”.  
Pan, tilt, and zoom operations are the same as in the  
Admin Viewer. For details, see “How to Operate the  
(4) [BLC] (Back Light Compensation) button  
This button turns on/off backlight compensation. This  
control is effective when the video is dark due to  
backlight.  
(2) [Switch Mouse Operation] button  
Each time this button is clicked, the button switches  
between  
video display area changes.  
When the button is set to  
resized/moved. While in this mode, the camera  
orientation will not change.  
and  
, and the mouse operation in the  
(5) [Obtain/Release Camera Control] button  
This button is used to obtain/release the camera  
control privileges. For details, see “Obtaining Camera  
Control Privileges” (p. 126). If camera control  
privileges have not yet been obtained elsewhere,  
, privacy masks can be  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
such as in the Admin Viewer, the control privileges will  
be obtained the moment the Privacy Mask Setting  
Tool is launched.  
(16)[Save settings]  
Save the privacy mask settings specified under  
[Detailed Settings] in the camera.  
(6) [Control for Admin] button  
Displays the Control for Admin Panel (p. 117).  
Setting the Privacy Mask Area  
(7) Registered Privacy Mask Display Area (Capture area)  
You can check the settings for the area where the  
camera can physically capture privacy masks.  
Set the privacy mask area while checking the video on the  
camera.  
If you have not yet obtained the camera control  
privileges, click the [Obtain/Release Camera Control]  
button and obtain the control privileges.  
Even if a panorama image is saved in the camera, it  
will not be displayed here.  
1
(8) [Registered Privacy Masks]  
Show the number of registered privacy masks. You  
can set up to eight privacy masks.  
Set the position and size of the privacy mask area.  
2
A preview frame showing the privacy mask area is  
shown in the video display area.  
(9) [Next]  
When multiple privacy masks are set, clicking this  
button switches to the privacy mask selected.  
(10)[Color]  
Choose the color for the privacy mask area. All  
privacy mask areas are set to the selected color.  
(11)[Quick add]  
Add a privacy mask area and save it in the camera.  
(12)[Quick change]  
If you want to change the size, drag the square  
markers () positioned at the four sides of the preview  
frame. Drag from inside the frame to move the privacy  
mask area.  
If you want to cancel the changes and restore the  
settings saved in the camera, click [Restore settings].  
Change a privacy mask area and save it in the  
camera.  
(13)[Delete]  
Delete the privacy mask area selected from the  
camera.  
(14)[Detailed Settings]  
Click [Quick add] to save the privacy mask area.  
Show the detailed settings.  
3
(14)-1 [Enable privacy mask] checkbox  
Select the checkbox if you want to enable the  
selected privacy mask area settings.  
The set privacy mask area is saved in the camera.  
(14)-2 [Pan], [Tilt], [Zoom]  
You can specify values for each camera angle.  
(14)-3 [Get camera position]  
Load the current camera angle. Load the pan, tilt,  
and zoom settings of the camera and show them in  
(14)-2.  
You can set up to eight privacy masks. Repeat the  
setting operations to set multiple privacy mask areas.  
(14)-4 [Privacy Mask Position and Size]  
Set left and upper edge, width, and height of the  
privacy mask.  
Confirm privacy mask areas.  
4
Saved privacy mask areas are shown in the video  
display area and registered privacy mask display  
area (capture area).  
(14)-5 [Preview settings]  
The settings will be reflected in the video display  
area and in the registered privacy mask display  
area (capture area).  
(15)[Restore settings]  
Clear the settings you have specified on the screen of  
the tool and restore the settings saved in the camera.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Privacy Mask Setting Tool  
Important  
(1)  
(2) (3) (4)  
• The privacy mask areas are also part of the intelligent  
function detection area. Subject movement may be seen.  
• Privacy masks are applied to all video transmitted from the  
camera (live video, uploaded video, recorded video, video  
recorded to a memory card).  
• Check privacy mask settings again if the [Video] > [Video  
Size Set] settings on the Setting page have been changed.  
5
• The privacy mask function is not available in the following  
situations:  
– While the camera is starting up after being turned on  
For the video display area in [Setting  
Page] > [Camera Angle]  
While a panorama image is being created  
(1)  
(3)  
• Set the privacy mask area to a somewhat larger size than the  
area you want to hide. Also, be sure to confirm that after  
setting a privacy mask, the area you want to hide does not  
become visible when the camera direction is altered by pan,  
tilt, or zoom operations.  
(1) Privacy Mask Area  
• If the privacy mask settings were changed after a panorama  
image was saved using the Panorama Creation Tool, the  
panorama image must be recreated using the Panorama  
Creation Tool.  
Enabled privacy mask areas are shown filled with  
color. Disabled privacy mask areas are just shown  
in a frame.  
(2) View Restriction Area  
This is the area set with the View Restriction Setting  
Tool.  
• Privacy masks may deviate slightly from their specified  
positions depending on the zoom position.  
• You can set privacy masks for optical zoom areas only.  
Privacy mask areas cannot be set in digital zoom areas.  
(3) Privacy Mask Area  
Privacy masks for which the [Enable privacy mask]  
checkbox is selected are shown filled with color.  
Privacy masks that are not selected are shown in a  
hatched frame.  
(4) Maximum Wide-angle Area  
This is the visible area when the camera is at  
maximum wide-angle. This area is only shown  
when a privacy mask area (3) is being dragged.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Click [Quick change] to save the privacy mask area.  
Changing/Deleting a Privacy Mask Area  
3
The changed privacy mask area is saved in the  
camera.  
How to Change  
Select the privacy mask area you want to change.  
1
Click the privacy mask area you want to change in the  
registered privacy mask display area (capture area)  
or select a privacy mask area by clicking [Next].  
Note  
Select a disabled privacy mask and click [Quick change] to  
enable it.  
How to Delete  
Change the position and size of the privacy mask area.  
Select the privacy mask area you want to delete and click  
[Delete].  
2
Privacy mask areas can be changed using the mouse  
or by entering values.  
The privacy mask area that was saved in the camera is  
deleted.  
Entering values  
Click [Detailed Settings].  
Enter a value for the [Privacy Mask Position and Size]  
and click [Preview settings] to check the position and  
size of the preview frame.  
Click [Get camera position] to load the current pan,  
tilt, and zoom settings.  
If you want to cancel the changes and restore the  
settings saved in the camera, click [Restore settings].  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Panorama Creation Tool  
A panorama image capture/creation tool that shows the entire area that can be captured by this camera. When performing  
pan, tilt, or zoom operations, setting presets using the viewer, etc., you can see at a glance which part of the entire area the  
set area is occupying.  
5
Create/capture a panorama image with the Panorama Creation Tool and save  
it in the camera.  
Admin Viewer  
Preset Setting Tool  
You can see at a glance which  
part of the entire area the  
displayed area is occupying.  
Important  
If the privacy mask settings were changed using the Privacy Mask Setting Tool, it is  
recommended that you recreate the panorama image to reflect the new privacy mask  
settings in the panorama image.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Display Screens of Panorama Creation Tool  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
(6)  
(12)  
(13)  
(7)  
(8)  
(14)  
(11)  
(9)  
(10)  
(1) [Load from camera]  
Capturing a Panorama Image  
Show the panorama image saved in the camera.  
Click [Start Panorama Creation].  
(2) [Save to camera]  
1
Save the currently shown panorama image in the  
camera.  
The capture is started.  
Change the settings beforehand for [Exposure Lock],  
[White Balance Lock], and [Focus Lock] (VB-S30D  
only) as necessary.  
(3) [Load from file]  
Show JPEG files as a panorama image.  
(4) [Save to file]  
Save the currently shown panorama image as a JPEG  
file.  
(5) Creation date and time  
Show the date and time a panorama image was  
captured or loaded from a JPEG file.  
To stop the capture when underway, click [Cancel].  
(6) [Clear]  
Delete the currently shown panorama image.  
(7) Panorama Image Display Area  
Show the panorama image.  
(8) [Cancel]  
Stop the capture of a panorama image.  
(9) [Start Panorama Creation]  
When you position the mouse pointer over the  
panorama image, a white grid is shown. If you want to  
recapture part of the panorama, position the pointer  
inside the grid, right-click and select [Recapture].  
Start capturing a panorama image.  
(10)[Finish Panorama Creation]  
Confirm the captured panorama image.  
(11)Status Display  
Show the panorama image capturing status, such as  
[Capturing images...], etc.  
(12)[Exposure Lock]  
Select [Center] or [Current Position] for the auto  
exposure lock position.  
To recapture an entire panorama image, click [Start  
Panorama Creation] again.  
(13)[White Balance Lock]  
Set the white balance to [Do not lock], [Center], or  
[Current Position].  
(14)[Focus Lock]  
Set the focus to [Do not lock], [Center], or [Current  
Position].  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Panorama Creation Tool  
Saving a Panorama Image as Image Files/  
Opening from Image Files  
Note  
• While a panorama image is being created, the connection of  
anyone other than Administrators and connections other than  
RTP are cut off.  
You can save a recorded panorama image as an image  
file or open image files as a panorama image. Only JPEG  
image files created using Panorama Creation Tool can be  
handled.  
• When a small value is entered for [Maximum Frame Rate:  
Video Transmission] under [Video] > [JPEG] in the Setting  
page, panorama capture is slowed down.  
When the capture is complete, click [Finish Panorama  
Creation] if the image is satisfactory.  
2
How to Save  
5
Click [Save to file] and then select the folder you want to  
save the image file in and enter the file name in the  
displayed dialog box.  
Saving/Deleting a Panorama Image on the  
Camera  
After creating the panorama image, it is sent to and saved  
on the camera to update the camera's panorama image.  
How to Save  
Click [Save to camera], and then click [OK] in the  
displayed dialog box.  
How to Open from Image Files  
Click [Load from file] and then select the image files you  
want to use in the displayed dialog box.  
The panorama image is saved to the camera.  
How to Delete  
To delete the panorama image saved to the camera,  
click [Clear].  
1
The image in the panorama image display area will be  
cleared.  
Click [Save to camera], and then click [OK] in the  
displayed dialog box.  
2
The panorama image saved in the camera is deleted.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
View Restriction Setting Tool  
View Restriction Setting Tool is a tool that limits the range that can be captured by the camera. If view restrictions have been  
set, you can limit the displayable capture range using the viewer.  
To limit zoom or a certain field of view when publishing live video, use the  
View Restriction Setting Tool to set the view restrictions easily.  
[Apply View Restriction Setting]  
Restrictions set by the View Restriction Setting Tool are applied in the following cases.  
• When the Admin Viewer is accessed with authorized user authorities  
• When the VB Viewer is accessed  
• When accessed via the Intelligent Function Setting Tool  
• When accessed via RM-Lite  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
View Restriction Setting Tool  
Display Screens of View Restriction Setting Tool  
(1)  
(2) (3)  
(6)  
(6)-1  
(6)-2  
(6)-3  
(7)  
(8)  
5
(9)  
(10)  
(5) (4)  
(11)  
(12)  
(1) Video Display Area  
(6)-3 Telephoto preview frame (yellow frame)  
Telephoto restriction setting (restriction of  
maximum zoom ratio)  
The video currently captured by the camera is shown.  
Pan, tilt, and zoom operations are the same as in the  
Admin Viewer. For details, see “How to Operate the  
(7) [Digital Zoom]  
The current digital zoom usage status of the camera is  
shown in real time.  
(2) [Switch Mouse Operation] button  
Click the button to switch to  
the mouse pointer to the video display area and click  
to operate the pan and tilt. Click the button again to  
. In this mode, move  
(8) [Apply the view restriction]  
To use view restrictions, select this checkbox.  
(9) View restriction setting entry boxes and [Get value]  
You can enter a value in each view restriction setting  
entry box to change the applicable setting. You can  
load the values for the current camera angle to the  
view restriction settings by clicking [Get value].  
return to  
.
(3) [Switch Screen Size] button  
Each time this button is clicked, the screen size of the  
video display area switches between “480 x 270” and  
“960 x 540”.  
• View restriction settings  
(4) [Obtain/Release Camera Control] button  
This button is used to obtain/release the camera  
control privileges. For details, see “Obtaining Camera  
[Upper Limit]: Top limit of the view restriction. Click  
[Get value] to load the top edge  
value of the current camera angle.  
[Lower Limit]: Bottom limit of the view restriction.  
Click [Get value] to load the bottom  
edge value of the current camera  
angle.  
(5) [Control for Admin] button  
Displays the Control for Admin Panel (p. 117).  
(6) [Panorama Screen]  
[Left Limit]:  
Left limit of the view restriction. Click  
[Get value] to load the left edge value  
of the current camera angle.  
The panorama image registered in the camera is  
shown. View restriction preview frames, representing  
the view restriction setting values, are also shown. You  
can drag the frames to change their shapes, with the  
new settings being reflected in View Restriction  
Settings.  
[Right Limit]: Right limit of the view restriction.  
Click [Get value] to load the right  
edge value of the current camera  
angle.  
• View restriction preview frame  
(6)-1 Pan/tilt preview frame (red frame)  
Range of field of view defined by  
top/ bottom/left/right edges  
(6)-2 Wide-angle preview frame (green frame)  
Wide-angle restriction setting (restriction of  
capture frame)  
[Telephoto]: Telephoto limit of the view restriction.  
Click [Get value] to load the zoom  
ratio of the current camera angle.  
[Wide-angle]: Wide-angle limit of the view restriction.  
Click [Get value] to load the zoom  
ratio of the current camera angle.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
(10)[Display in panorama screen]  
Setting by Loading Position Information from  
Apply the current view restriction settings to the  
panorama screen. At this point, the settings are not  
yet saved in the camera. Be sure to click [Save  
settings].  
Video in Video Display Area  
Select the [Apply the view restriction] checkbox.  
1
(11)[Restore settings]  
Click the [Obtain/Release Camera Control] button to  
obtain the control privileges of the camera.  
Clear the settings you have specified on the screen of  
the tool and restore the settings saved in the camera.  
2
(12)[Save settings]  
Operate the camera to adjust the top edge, bottom  
edge, left edge, right edge, telephoto, or wide-angle to  
desired positions, and click [Get value] each time.  
Save the set view restriction in the camera.  
After the view restriction has been set, be sure to save  
the settings in the camera by clicking [Save settings].  
3
The loaded view restriction can be checked in the  
view restriction setting entry box or view restriction  
preview frame.  
Setting View Restrictions  
You can set view restrictions by entering values in the  
view restriction setting entry boxes, or by changing the  
current settings in the view restriction preview frame of the  
panorama screen or from the camera angle in the video  
display area. Select appropriate settings according to the  
environment in which the camera is operated or the  
purpose for which it is used.  
Click [Save settings].  
Use the preview frame on the panorama  
4
The settings are saved in the camera.  
image to set view restrictions.  
Select the [Apply the view restriction] checkbox.  
Important  
1
• If you have changed the camera mounting method,  
recapture the panorama image and register it again.  
• Check view restriction settings again if the [Video] > [Video  
Size Set] settings on the Setting page have been changed.  
Drag to change the [Pan/tilt preview frame (red  
2
frame)], [Telephoto preview frame (yellow frame)], or  
[Wide-angle preview frame (green frame)] shown on  
the panorama screen to set view restrictions.  
• The panorama screen may be slightly different from the  
actual image. After view restrictions have been set, be sure  
to confirm with the VB Viewer that the view restrictions have  
been reflected correctly.  
When the telephoto/wide-angle preview frames are  
enlarged/shrunk, the aspect ratio remains the same.  
At this time, you can also enter view restrictions by  
entering values in the view restriction setting entry  
boxes. If you have adjusted the view restriction  
settings, click [Display in panorama screen]. The  
settings are reflected in the preview frame of the  
panorama screen.  
• Confirm the settings using the VB Viewer. (View restrictions  
are not applied to the video display area of this tool, nor to  
the Admin Viewer.)  
• If the digital zoom setting has been changed, check the view  
restriction settings again.  
Note  
• Even when view restrictions are set, an area outside the view  
restriction may still appear momentarily when the camera is  
controlled near the boundary of the view restriction.  
Click [Save settings].  
3
• To cancel the view restrictions, clear the [Apply the view  
restriction] checkbox and then click [Save settings].  
Confirm that the settings have been applied correctly,  
and then click [Save settings] to save the settings in  
the camera.  
• If the setting fields are cleared while the [Apply the view  
restriction] checkbox is selected, the maximum view restriction  
will be set.  
• The controllable range and range that can be captured are as  
follows.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
View Restriction Setting Tool  
Maximum wide-angle viewing angle  
Pan controllable area  
Maximum horizontal captured area  
5
• The pan and tilt ranges vary depending on the zoom ratio  
(view angle).  
Setting view restrictions When wide-angle is selected,  
automatically restricts  
the camera operating  
angle.  
the capture of the camera  
operating angle would exceed  
the view restrictions if it  
remained the same. Therefore, it  
is narrowed automatically.  
View restrictions  
Camera operating angle  
Captured video range  
Camera  
• If the view restriction will be exceeded as a result of controlling  
the zoom toward maximum wide-angle, the camera will first  
pan and tilt to a position where the maximum wide-angle zoom  
will be within the viewing restriction area. Wide-angle zoom  
control will then be enabled within the view restriction area.  
After panning and  
First, the center of the  
maximum wide-angle  
zoom is panned and  
tilted.  
tilting, wide-angle zoom  
control is enabled within  
the view restriction.  
Captured video  
Restricted view angle  
Zoom  
out  
Zoom  
out  
• Reducing the view restriction may also reduce the zoom range.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Preset Setting Tool  
A tool that lets you set presets and the home position. You can set up to 20 presets and the home position while viewing the  
preview in the panorama or full video mode.  
Preset Setting Tool  
Reflecting in the viewer  
Important  
• If you want to use intelligent functions, it is strongly recommended that you use the  
Preset Setting Tool to register a preset that corresponds to the camera position of the  
area where you want to use intelligent functions.  
• The camera angle will be as follows when the camera is rebooted:  
Home position registered: Camera angle will move to the home position  
Home position not registered: Camera angle will move to the factory default home  
position  
• Presets that were set with the Preset Setting Tool cannot be used for the settings of  
intelligent functions.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Preset Setting Tool  
Display Screens of Preset Setting Tool  
(1)  
(2) (3)  
(6)  
(12)  
(13)  
(7)  
(8)  
(9)  
(10)  
(10)-1  
5
(14)  
(15)  
(10)-2  
(16)  
(11)  
(17)  
(18)  
(5) (4)  
(19)  
(20)  
(1) Video Display Area  
(9) [Preset Name]  
The video currently captured by the camera is shown.  
Pan, tilt, and zoom operations are the same as in the  
Admin Viewer. For details, see “How to Operate the  
You can enter a preset name of up to 64 characters.  
You can set a name in alphanumeric characters. Be  
sure to enter a single-byte alphanumeric preset name.  
When the [Home Position] is selected in (7), the preset  
name function is grayed out.  
(2) [Switch Mouse Operation] button  
In a [Preset Name], ASCII characters (spaces or  
printable characters) can be used.  
Click the button to switch to  
. In this mode, move  
the mouse pointer to the video display area and click  
to operate the pan and tilt. Click the button again to  
(10)[Detailed Settings]  
return to  
.
Show the detailed settings.  
(3) [Switch Screen Size] button  
(10)-1 [Show in viewers] checkbox  
Each time this button is clicked, the screen size of the  
video display area switches between “480 x 270” and  
“960 x 540”.  
Select this checkbox to use presets in the  
viewer. When the [Home Position] is selected in  
(7), this function is grayed out.  
(4) [Obtain/Release Camera Control] button  
This button is used to obtain/release the camera  
control privileges. For details, see “Obtaining Camera  
(10)-2 Camera Parameter  
Enter the center angle of the desired angle in  
[Pan] and [Tilt]. In [Zoom], enter the view angle.  
• Camera Angle  
(5) [Control for Admin] button  
[Pan]...... Set the pan position of the camera.  
[Tilt] .......Set the tilt position of the camera.  
[Zoom]...Set the viewing angle of the camera.  
Displays the Control for Admin Panel (p. 117).  
(6) [Panorama Screen]  
The panorama image registered in the camera is  
shown. A preset preview frame (yellow) reflecting the  
preset settings is shown, where you can drag to resize  
or move the frame and reflect the new frame in the  
preset settings. Also, if view restrictions are set, those  
areas are shown in a blue frame.  
• [BLC] (Back Light Compensation)  
Select [OFF] or [ON] for the BLC setting of the  
camera.  
The display is grayed out if [Smart Shade  
Control] is set to [Auto].  
• [Focus Mode]  
(7) [Preset/Home Position] selection box  
Select the preset (from 1 to 20) or [Home Position] you  
want to set.  
Select [Auto], [Manual], or [Fixed at infinity] for  
the focus mode of the camera. (p. 135)  
• [Smart Shade Control]  
(8) [Quick Registration]  
Select [OFF], a level from [1] (Mild) to [7]  
(Strong) or [Auto] for the smart shade control  
setting of the camera. (p. 135)  
Load the current camera position, and register them  
as preset settings.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
• [White Balance]  
Setting the Preset  
Set the white balance of the camera to [Auto]  
or according to the light source of the  
condition in which it is used. For details on  
light sources, see p. 43.  
Select presets or home position as needed for the  
operating environment or desired objectives. A preset can  
be set in the following ways.  
• [R Gain], [B Gain]  
If white balance is set to [Manual], set the  
respective gains to a value between 0 and  
1023.  
Setting from Camera Angle in the Video  
Display Area  
(11)[Get camera info]  
Select the preset you want to set from the [Preset/Home  
Position] selection box, and then fill the [Preset Name]  
1
Load the current camera angle of the video display  
area, or the [Focus] (VB-S30D only) and [Smart Shade  
Control] settings of Control for Admin (p. 117), and  
reflect them in the panorama screen or camera  
parameter settings.  
field  
.
Entry of a preset name (alphanumeric characters) is  
required.  
(12)[Full Image]  
Displays the full video obtained from the camera. A  
preset preview frame (yellow) reflecting the preset  
settings is shown. If you drag to resize or move the  
frame, the new frame is reflected in the preset  
settings.  
Click the [Obtain/Release Camera Control] button to  
2
obtain the control privileges of the camera  
.
(13)[Update Image]  
Load the full video from the current camera to update  
the video.  
(14)[Show in viewers] checkbox  
Select this checkbox to use presets in the viewer.  
When home position is selected in (8), this function is  
grayed out.  
(15)Camera Parameters  
Displays the values for the pan and tilt positions and  
zoom viewing angle in accordance with the size and  
position of the preset preview frame on [Full Image].  
Operate the camera from the video display area, set it  
to the desired position and click [Quick Registration].  
3
(16)[Get Digital PTZ Info]  
Load the current crop position of the video display  
area to reflect it in the preset preview frame in [Full  
Image] and the camera parameters.  
Use the preview frame of the panorama  
screen to set presets  
(17)[Preview settings]  
Preview camera parameter values that are being  
edited, in the video display area.  
Use the preview frame of the panorama screen to set  
presets.  
(18)[Clear settings]  
Select the preset you want to set from the [Preset/Home  
Delete the settings for the preset selected.  
1
Position] selection box, and then fill the [Preset Name]  
field.  
(19)[Restore settings]  
Clear the settings you have specified on the screen of  
the tool and restore the settings saved in the camera.  
Be sure to enter the preset name.  
(20)[Save settings]  
Save the edited preset settings in the camera.  
If presets have been set, be sure to save the settings  
by clicking [Save settings].  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Preset Setting Tool  
Using the Digital PTZ Function to Set Presets  
Use the Digital PTZ function to set part of the area that can  
be captured by the camera as a preset.  
Select the preset you want to set from the [Preset/  
Home Position] selection box, and then fill in the  
[Preset Name] field.  
1
Be sure to enter the preset name.  
5
Click [Detailed Settings] and select the [Show in  
viewers] checkbox.  
2
Select the [Show in viewers] checkbox.  
2
Drag to move or resize the preset preview frame  
(yellow) shown on the panorama screen to set the  
3
Change the position or size of the preset preview  
frame (yellow) displayed on [Full Image] to set the  
preset position.  
preset  
.
3
If you click on the full video, the preview frame will  
move to center on the clicked position.  
If you click on the panorama screen, the preview  
frame will move to center on the clicked point.  
Click [Preview settings].  
4
5
The settings are reflected in the video display area.  
If you previewed incorrect settings, etc., and want to  
restore the settings registered in the camera, click  
[Restore settings].  
Click [Preview settings].  
4
The settings are reflected in the video display area.  
If you previewed incorrect settings, etc., and want to  
restore the settings registered in the camera, click  
[Restore settings].  
Click [Save settings]  
.
Click [Save settings].  
5
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note  
Important  
Digital PTZ is a function for transmitting only the specified part of  
a camera video. Therefore, this function reduces the load on the  
network.  
• To use presets in the viewer, select the [Show in viewers]  
checkbox.  
• Set presets again if the camera mounting conditions have  
been changed.  
Specifying Detailed Settings  
• Check preset settings again if the [Video] > [Video Size Set]  
settings on the Setting page have been changed.  
If you want to fine-tune the camera angle or to adjust the  
video, etc., click [Detailed Settings] and specify the  
detailed settings before saving the preset settings in the  
camera.  
If [Manual] is selected in [Focus Mode], manually  
adjust the focus while checking the actual video in the video  
display area. After the focus has been adjusted, set the focus  
using [Get camera info]. Click [Save settings] to save the  
focus settings.  
Select the [Show in viewers] checkbox.  
1
Note  
• Up to 20 presets can be set.  
• Changes to preset settings are not reflected in already  
connected viewers.  
• You can disable presets in the viewer by clearing the [Show in  
viewers] checkbox under [Detailed settings].  
Preset positions cannot be set in the digital zoom area.  
Click [Get camera info].  
2
The camera parameters in the video display area are  
loaded to [Detailed Settings].  
Fine-tune the camera angle and adjust the video  
quality with focus (VB-S30D only) or smart shade  
control while checking the video.  
3
Click [Preview settings].  
4
The settings are reflected in the preview frame on the  
panorama screen and the video display area.  
If you previewed incorrect settings, etc., and want to  
restore the settings registered in the camera, click  
[Restore settings].  
Click [Save settings].  
5
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preset Setting Tool  
(10)[Change]  
Preset Tour  
Change the speed or pause time for presets selected  
from the tour schedule list.  
Set a preset tour whereby the camera tours and monitors  
the multiple presets currently set.  
Note  
• Preset tour is not performed while the camera is being  
controlled with viewers, Admin Tools, etc.  
[Preset Tour] Tab Display Screen  
• Preset tour is not performed when control privileges are  
obtained by RM-Lite.  
(1)  
(2)  
5
(3)  
Setting the Preset Tour  
(5)  
(7)  
(4)  
(6)  
(8)  
Select the touring method from the [Preset Tour]  
selection box.  
1
(9)  
(10)  
Select [For Viewers] or [Always].  
(1) [Preset Tour] selection box.  
Select when you want to perform a preset tour from  
the following options.  
[Not used]  
Preset tour is not performed.  
[For Viewers]  
Preset tour is performed when a camera is  
connected via the VB Viewer, etc.  
Setting the preset tour time  
[Always]  
Preset tour is always performed.  
Select the [Set Preset Tour Time] checkbox.  
Enter values for [Start Time] and [End Time] to set the  
preset tour time.  
(2) [Set Preset Tour Time] checkbox  
This setting is enabled when [For Viewers] or [Always]  
is selected in (1). Select the checkbox to configure a  
preset tour at a predetermined time, and enter the  
start time and stop time for the preset tour.  
Select the preset number you want to add to the tour  
schedule from the [Preset] selection box, and then  
click [Add].  
2
The preset is registered in the tour schedule list. Up to  
20 presets can be registered.  
(3) Tour schedule list  
A list of presets set for preset tour.  
(4) [Up] / [Down]  
Select preset in the list and click [Up] or [Down] to  
change sequence of the tour schedule list. Presets  
tours are performed in order from the top of the list.  
Select a preset in the tour schedule list, and set the  
preset operation.  
3
(5) [Delete]  
Delete the preset selected from the tour schedule list.  
(6) [Preset] selection box  
Select the preset you want to add to the tour schedule  
list.  
In [Pause (sec)], you can enter the number of  
seconds for the camera to remain stationary at the  
preset position.  
When [Preview] is clicked, the camera angle switches  
to this preset, and the new angle can be checked in  
the video display area.  
(7) [Preview]  
The camera angle switches to the selected preset,  
and the new angle can be checked in the video  
display area.  
(8) [Pause (sec)]  
Set the time at which the camera stops at the preset  
position.  
Click [Change].  
4
You can set between 1 and 900 seconds in 1-second  
increments.  
When you want to delete changes made to the tour  
schedule list and restore the settings registered in the  
camera, click [Restore settings].  
(9) [Add]  
Add the preset to the tour schedule list.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Click [Save settings].  
5
When you complete setting the tour schedule list, click  
[Save settings]. The settings are saved in the camera.  
Note  
The home position cannot be added to the tour schedule list.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Intelligent Function Setting Tool  
This tool is used to set intelligent functions that perform uploads, notify the viewer, etc., if a change has occurred in the  
captured video due to movement of a subject.  
Camera Tampering Detection  
Camera  
E-mail notification  
5
Moving Object Detection  
Volume Detection  
Network  
Admin Viewer  
RM Viewer  
Passing Detection  
Upload to FTP  
server/HTTP  
server  
Abandoned Object Detection  
Video recording on  
storage server  
Removed Object Detection  
The intelligent functions can perform the following 6 types of detection. Use detection types that best serve your needs.  
Moving Object Detection  
Detect moving objects. This function can be used to detect visitors or suspicious individuals.  
Moving object detection is triggered when moving objects are inside the detection area.  
Moving object enters/  
leaves area.  
Alert  
Detection begins when a  
moving object enters the  
designated area.  
Background Video Generated  
Change in Designated Area  
Analysis  
Moving Object Detected  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Abandoned Object Detection  
Detect objects that are carried in and abandoned for a certain amount of time. This function  
can be used to detect objects that have been left.  
Abandoned object detection is triggered when an object is left in the detection area for a  
specified duration.  
Alert  
Object abandoned.  
The object is abandoned  
and detection begins  
after set time.  
Background Video Generated  
Change in Designated Area  
Analysis  
Abandoned Object Detected  
Removed Object Detection  
Detect objects that are being removed. This function can be used to detect actions such as  
taking away valuables.  
Removed object detection is triggered when an object is removed from the detection area  
for a specified duration.  
Picture has disappeared.  
Alert  
The picture (object) is  
removed and detection  
begins after set time.  
Background Video Generated  
Change in Designated Area  
Analysis  
Object Removal Detected  
Camera Tampering Detection  
Detect when the capture is being obstructed. This function can be used to detect when the  
camera orientation is changed or the video display is obstructed with spray, etc.  
Camera tampering detection is triggered when an area exceeding the set ratio is  
continuously altered by an object, etc.  
Tampering detected.  
Alert  
Detection begins when a portion  
of the video that exceeds the set  
ratio is continuously altered.  
Background Video Generated  
Video Area Changes  
Analysis  
Camera Tampering Detected  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Intelligent Function Setting Tool  
Passing Detection  
Detect when a person or moving object crosses a specified line.  
It determines that an object is passing when the decision point of the object detection frame  
crosses a detection line.  
Passing detected.  
Alert  
5
Detection begins when  
decision point of object  
crosses detection line.  
Background Video Generated  
Video Area Changes  
Passing Detected  
Analysis  
Volume Detection  
Detect specified volume levels. For setting details, see “Chapter 4 Setting Page” [Event] >  
Caution  
Notes on Use of This Camera  
The intelligent functions are not suitable for applications where high reliability is required. If constant and maximum  
reliability is required for surveillance it is not recommended that you use this function. Canon shall assume no  
liability for any accident, loss or other undesirable outcomes resulting from intelligent function operations.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Screen of Intelligent Function Setting Tool  
(1)  
(2) (3)  
(11)  
(12)  
(13)  
(14)  
(15)  
(16)  
(17)  
(18)  
(7)  
(8)  
(9)  
(10)  
(6) (5) (4)  
(19)  
(20)  
(1) Video Display Area  
(5) [Obtain/Release Camera Control] button  
This button is used to obtain/release the camera  
control privileges. For details, see “Obtaining Camera  
Control Privileges(p. 126). If camera control  
privileges have not yet been obtained elsewhere,  
such as in the Admin Viewer, the control privileges will  
be obtained the moment the Intelligent Function  
Setting Tool is launched.  
The video currently captured by the camera is shown.  
Detection areas are shown in translucently colored  
frames (rectangular or polygonal) and the detection  
line is shown as a translucently colored polygonal line  
or line segment. Also, subjects for which movement  
has been detected are shown in a detection block  
and detection frame.  
(6) [Control for Admin] button  
Pan, tilt, and zoom operations are the same as in the  
Admin Viewer. For details, see “How to Operate the  
However, when the (11) [Lock camera position]  
checkbox is selected, the camera is fixed at a preset  
position and cannot perform pan, tilt, and zoom  
operations.  
Show the Control for Admin Panel (p. 117).  
(7) [Event Display]  
Show the event display panel (p. 108).  
(8) [Display Options]  
Select the [Detection Area/Line] or [Detection Results]  
you want to show in the video display area from the  
following items.  
(2) [Switch Mouse Operation] button  
• [Selected Detection Settings Only]  
Show the detection areas/lines or detection results  
only for those detection settings selected in the  
[Detection Setting List].  
Each time this button is clicked, the button switches  
between  
and  
, and the mouse operation in the  
video display area changes.  
When the button is set to  
, detection areas can be  
created/resized/moved. While in this mode, the  
camera orientation will not change.  
• [All Detection Settings]  
Show the detection areas/lines or detection results  
for all detection settings in the [Detection Setting  
List].  
When the button is set to  
and the (11) [Lock  
camera position] checkbox is not selected, pan, tilt,  
and other operations can be performed.  
• [Detection Settings of the Same Type]  
(3) [Switch Screen Size] button  
Show the detection areas/lines or detection results  
for the same type of detection settings as those  
selected in the [Detection Setting List].  
Each time this button is clicked, the screen size of the  
video display area switches between “480 x 270” and  
“960 x 540”.  
• [Do not display]  
(4) [BLC] button  
No detection areas/lines or detection results are  
shown.  
This button turns on/off backlight compensation. This  
control is effective when the video is dark due to  
backlight.  
(9) [Restart intelligent function]  
If the background video has changed while you were  
specifying settings or detection results are not as set,  
etc., click this button to restart the intelligent function.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Intelligent Function Setting Tool  
If camera control privileges are not obtained, this  
function is grayed out.  
the tool and restore the settings saved in the camera.  
(20)[Save settings]  
Save the edited detection settings in the camera.  
After the detection settings have been specified, be  
sure to save the settings in the camera by clicking  
[Save settings].  
Important  
It takes tens of seconds for the intelligent function to restart. No  
detection is performed while restarting.  
(10)[Detection Settings]  
Flow of Intelligent Function Setting  
Show the [Detection Settings] dialog box (p. 108).  
This dialog box allows you to reduce the effects of  
lighting changes.  
5
The intelligent functions are set according to the  
procedure below. For details on the setting method, see  
each setting page.  
(11)[Lock camera position] checkbox  
Select this checkbox to move the camera position to a  
preset position selected from the preset selection box  
and lock it there. Lock the camera position when  
specifying detection settings to obtain a correct  
detection result.  
Important  
Presets that were set with the Preset Setting  
Tool cannot be used for the settings of intelligent functions.  
If camera control privileges are not obtained or if  
preset positions are not set, this function is grayed  
out.  
Camera Position Settings  
(12)Camera position selection box  
Register the camera angle as a preset using the  
Preset Setting Tool.  
Select the camera position from the view restriction  
presets or the home position. Use the Preset Setting  
Tool to set presets or the home position (p. 90).  
If camera control privileges are not obtained, the  
[Lock camera position] checkbox is not selected, or if  
the preset position is not set within the view restriction  
area, this function is grayed out.  
1
For details on the preset setting method, see “Preset  
Important  
It is strongly recommended that you preset the camera angle in  
advance and lock the camera at a preset position with the  
Intelligent Function Setting Tool. An angle of view that captures  
the target object up close is also recommended.  
(13)[Detection Setting List]  
A list with the specified detection settings is shown.  
(14)[Add]  
The [New Detection Settings] dialog box is shown and  
detection settings can be added.  
Launch the Intelligent Function Setting Tool.  
2
(15)[Delete]  
Delete detection settings selected from the [Detection  
Setting List].  
Click [Yes].  
3
(16)[Detection Setting Number], [Detection Type]  
The detection setting numbers and detection types  
selected from the [Detection Setting List] are shown.  
(17)[Enable these detection settings] checkbox  
Select this checkbox to enable the detection settings  
that are selected in the [Detection Setting List].  
This selects [Lock camera position] in the Intelligent  
Function Setting Tool.  
If [No] is clicked, select [Lock camera position].  
(18)[Detection Criteria] tab, [Event] tab  
Switch between the Detection Criteria and Event tabs.  
• [Detection Criteria]  
Specify detection settings name, detection area/line,  
and detection criteria (p. 103).  
• [Event]  
Select a preset.  
Specify operations to be performed when events  
occur (p. 104).  
4
(19)[Restore settings]  
Clear the settings you have specified on the screen of  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Intelligent Function Settings  
Important  
Add detection settings.  
Notes on intelligent function settings and operation  
1
• When setting intelligent function, do an actual detection test  
to confirm that detection will be performed correctly.  
When you click [Add] in the [Detection Setting List],  
the [New Detection Settings] dialog box is displayed.  
Set the [Detection Setting Number] and [Detection  
Type] of the detection setting you want to add, and  
then click [OK].  
• When the entire screen is exposed to sudden changes in  
brightness, detection may not be performed as intended for  
up to 5 minutes.  
Up to 15 different detection settings can be  
registered.  
• If [Auto] is used in [Day/Night] settings or automatic  
switching between [Day Mode] and [Night Mode] is  
performed when a timer is used, [Restarting intelligent  
function. Please wait.] is shown and intelligent function will  
restart. Detection will not be performed while intelligent  
function is restarting.  
(1)  
(2)  
• If the camera is operated during intelligent function setting or  
operation, [Restarting intelligent function. Please wait.] is  
shown and intelligent function will restart. Detection will not  
be performed while intelligent function is restarting.  
(1) [Detection Setting Number]  
Specify a detection setting number from 1 to 15 for the  
detection area you want to set.  
• If [Video] > [Video Size Set] on the Setting page is changed,  
be sure to change the preset position setting (VB-S30D/VB-  
S31D only) and intelligent function settings, and check the  
operation. The intelligent function may not operate,  
depending on the settings.  
(2) [Detection Type]  
Select detection types that suit your purpose from  
[Moving Object Detection], [Abandoned Object  
Detection], [Removed Object Detection], [Camera  
Tampering Detection], or [Passing Detection]. For  
details on detection types, see p. 97.  
• Set intelligent function again if the angle of view is changed  
through camera operation, or the camera position of a preset  
or home position is changed using Preset Setting Tool.  
Enable Detection Settings.  
2
• If an [Enable] detection setting exists under [Status] in the  
[Detection Setting List] while the camera position is locked,  
control privileges cannot be obtained by VB Viewer or RM.  
Also, the custom settings automatic control will no longer run.  
To enable detection settings, select [Enable these  
detection settings].  
Clear this checkbox to disable a setting.  
Difficult-to-detect Subjects  
• Objects or portions where there is little contrast in color or  
brightness with the background may not be detected.  
• Small objects and changes on the screen may not be  
detected.  
Set detection criteria ([Detection Criteria] tab p. 103).  
3
Set detection criteria while operating the camera and  
checking the video in the video display area.  
• Partial or entire changes in light on the screen may trigger  
detection.  
Set operations to be performed when a change in a  
subject is detected ([Event] tab p. 104).  
• If multiple objects overlap, the detection status may change.  
In particular, passing may not be detected or may be  
detected at the wrong timing.  
4
Save the detection settings in the camera.  
5
Click [Save settings] to save the settings in the  
camera.  
Check the detection result.  
6
You can check the detection status of the specified  
detection settings in the event display panel (p. 139).  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Intelligent Function Setting Tool  
Setting Intelligent Function Detection  
Settings  
Video Display Area  
Detection Area  
Setting Detection Criteria ([Detection  
Criteria] tab)  
Set detection criteria while operating the camera and  
checking the video in the video display area.  
5
(1) [Detection Settings Name]  
[Detection Criteria] tab  
You can use up to 64 characters in a detection setting  
name. Be sure to enter a single-byte alphanumeric  
detection setting name.  
Moving object detection, abandoned object  
detection, camera tampering detection  
In a [Detection Settings Name], ASCII characters  
(spaces or printable characters) can be used.  
(2) [Area Shape]  
Select [Rectangular] or [Polygonal] for the shape of  
detection areas you want to set in the video display  
area.  
For details on detection area setting operations, see  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
[Quick setting]  
The detection area is drawn automatically when the  
detection criteria is [Removed Object Detection].  
Removed object detection  
[Clear]  
If the [Area Shape] is [Polygonal], the detection area  
set in the video display area is deleted.  
(3) [Display Color]  
(1)  
Choose the color of the detection setting. The color  
selected here becomes the display color of the  
detection area/line in the video display area.  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(4) [Object Size (%)] [Change Ratio (%)] [Duration (Sec)]  
Set the lower limit for the size, change ratio, and  
judgment time for the set detection area to trigger  
detection. If the value set here is exceeded, “Detected”  
mode is triggered.  
Passing detection  
Click the text box to enter a value directly, or specify a  
value using the slider.  
For details on the setting method, see “Setting  
(1)  
(5)  
(3)  
(6)  
(5) [Clear detection line]  
Clears the detection line set in the video display area.  
(6) [Passing Direction]  
(7)  
(4)  
Select the passing direction of a moving object  
relative to the detection line.  
(7) [Decision Point]  
Select the point of a moving object that will be used as  
criteria for passing detection when a moving object  
crosses a detection line.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
[External Device Output for OFF Event] checkbox  
Select this checkbox for enabling external device  
output at an OFF event and select operation (active or  
inactive).  
Important  
It is recommended that the detection criteria are set in a  
condition as close as possible to the condition in which the  
camera is actually used. Perform a detection test in advance to  
make sure that the detection frame continues to be displayed  
for a subject targeted for passing detection.  
Setting Detection Areas  
Set detection areas in the video display area.  
Setting Event Operations ([Event] tab)  
Set operations to be performed upon detection of  
changes in a subject.  
Setting a [Rectangular] detection area  
A rectangle is shown in the video display area. Move or  
resize that rectangle to set a detection area.  
[Event] tab  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
Setting a [Polygonal] detection area  
Specify polygonal areas with a maximum of 32 angles.  
Click in the video display area to form the polygon point  
by point. Click on a previously set point to complete the  
polygon and set the enclosed area as the detection area.  
The set area can also be moved by dragging it.  
(1) Specify the operation timing. (Multiple checkboxes can  
be selected.)  
[ON Event Operation] checkbox  
When selected, the operations set in (2) [E-mail  
Notification] and [Video Record] are performed the  
moment detected mode is triggered to ON.  
[OFF Event Operation] checkbox  
When selected, the operations set in (2) [E-mail  
Notification] and [Video Record] are performed the  
moment detected mode is triggered to OFF.  
[Detected mode Operation] checkbox  
When selected, the operations set in (2) [E-mail  
Notification] and [Video Record] are performed for as  
long as detected mode is active.  
Setting a detection area using [Quick setting]  
[Quick setting] can be configured for [Removed Object  
Detection] only.  
(2) Specify the event operation. (Multiple checkboxes can  
be selected.)  
[E-mail Notification] checkbox  
When selected, e-mail notification is performed at the  
timing set in (1). [E-mail Notification] must be set in  
advance under [Upload] in the Setting page (p. 53).  
Temporarily remove the object whose removal you  
want to detect from the video display area.  
1
[Video Record] checkbox  
When selected, video record is performed at the  
timing set in (1). [Video Record Action] must be set in  
advance under [Event] in the Setting page (p. 56).  
Click [Restart intelligent function].  
2
The background video is created.  
(3) Operation of External Device Output  
Replace the object whose removal you want to detect  
in its original position.  
3
[External Device Output for ON Event] checkbox  
Select this checkbox for enabling external device  
output at an ON event and select operation (active or  
inactive).  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Intelligent Function Setting Tool  
Click [Quick setting].  
Note  
4
5
• Drag the square marks () at each angle to change the shape  
of the detection line.  
An outline for the detection object is drawn using a  
polygon with up to 32 points.  
If there are multiple detection objects, the area is  
drawn around the largest object.  
• Click [Clear detection line] to delete a detection line.  
Setting Detection Criteria per Detection Type  
Specify different detection criteria for each detection type.  
5
Configured detection  
area  
Detect criteria for [Moving Object Detection]  
Set detection areas where you want to detect moving  
objects.  
Click [Restart intelligent function] again.  
For [Object Size (%)], enter a value or move the slider to  
set the ratio of the size of an object moving in the  
detection area to the size of the detection area.  
When the ratio of an area where the camera has detected  
a moving object exceeds the value set for [Object Size  
(%)], detected mode is triggered to ON.  
Note  
• Drag the square marks () at each angle to change the shape  
of the polygon.  
• Click [Clear] to delete the polygonal detection area.  
• The camera tampering detection area cannot be changed.  
Changing a [Rectangular] detection area into a [Polygonal]  
shape or changing a [Polygonal] detection area into a  
[Rectangular] shape  
Changing the shape of the detection areas already set  
deletes that area and switches to a new drawing setting.  
When [Object Size (%)] is changed, an indicator frame  
showing the size of the object is displayed for 1 second in  
the center of the video display area, allowing specification  
of the settings while checking the size ratio.  
Detection area  
Setting the Detection Line  
Object size indicator  
Use the video display area to set the detection line.  
Specify a detection line consisting of a polygonal line with  
a maximum of 32 angles.  
In the video display area, click the start point of the  
detection line and then click the end point. To create a  
detection line consisting of polygonal line, click each  
angle in the polygonal line in order.  
To confirm a detection line, click any of the already set  
angles.  
Any moving objects detected are shown with contour lines.  
If a moving object is smaller than [Object Size (%)], its  
contour lines are white. If the moving object is larger than  
[Object Size (%)], its contour lines take on the same color  
as the detection area, indicating that “detection” mode has  
been triggered to ON.  
The angles in a confirmed detection line can be dragged  
to change the shape of a detection line and lines between  
angles can be dragged to change the position of the  
detection line.  
Contour lines of a  
detected moving  
object  
Detect criteria for [Abandoned Object Detection]  
Set areas where you want to detect abandoned objects as  
detection areas.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
[Object Size (%)]  
Any moving objects detected are shown with contour  
lines. As long as [Duration (Sec)] has not elapsed,  
contour lines are white. When [Duration (Sec)] has  
elapsed, contour lines take on the same color as the  
detection area, indicating that “detected” mode has been  
triggered to ON.  
Enter a value or move the slider to set the ratio of the size  
of an object that was left behind in the detection area to  
the size of the detection area.  
When [Object Size (%)] is changed, an indicator frame  
representing the area of the object is displayed for 1  
second in the center of the video display area. This allows  
you to check the size ratio of the abandoned object  
detection area while specifying the [Object Size (%)]  
setting.  
Contour of removed  
object  
[Duration (Sec)]  
Set the time that must elapse after an object has been left.  
If both the values for [Object Size (%)] and [Duration  
(Sec)] are exceeded, detection mode is triggered to ON.  
Important  
Set detection areas for removed object detection so that they  
precisely match the contours of the object in question.  
Object size indicator  
Detection area  
Influence from the target object’s shadow or adjacent objects  
may result in the target object being recognized as larger than  
actual and will not trigger Removed Object Detection. In such  
cases, reconfigure the detection area to outline the recognized  
target object. Alternatively, use [Quick setting] (p. 104).  
Any moving objects detected are shown with contour lines.  
If [Object Size (%)] and [Duration (Sec)] are not exceeded,  
contour lines are white. When all detection criteria are met,  
contour lines take on the same color as the detection area  
and “detected” mode is triggered to ON.  
Detect criteria for [Camera Tampering Detection]  
For [Camera Tampering Detection], the entire video  
display area becomes the detection area. “Detected”  
mode will be triggered to ON when the video is obstructed  
over an area exceeding the ratio set in [Change Ratio  
(%)].  
Contour of abandoned  
object  
When [Change Ratio (%)] is changed, an indicator frame  
representing the area that can be obstructed is displayed  
for 1 second in the center of the video display area. This  
allows you to check the change ratio of the camera  
tampering detection area, which occupies the entire video  
display area, while specifying the [Change Ratio (%)]  
setting.  
Detect criteria for [Removed Object Detection]  
Set detection areas for objects whose removal you want to  
detect.  
For [Duration (Sec)], set the time that must elapse after  
the object has been taken away. Detected mode will be  
triggered to ON when an object is taken away from the  
detection area for a period longer than the set [Duration  
(Sec)].  
Obstructed area  
indicator  
Any moving objects detected are shown with contour  
lines. If it is smaller than [Change Ratio (%)], contour lines  
are white. If the video is changed for an area larger than  
[Change Ratio (%)], contour lines take on the same color  
as the detection area, indicating that “detected” mode  
has been triggered to ON.  
Removed object  
detected  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Intelligent Function Setting Tool  
When a moving object exceeds the value set for [Object  
Size (%)], it becomes a passing detection target.  
When [Object Size (%)] is changed, an indicator frame  
showing the size of the object is displayed for 1 second in  
the center of the video display area, allowing specification  
of the settings while checking the size ratio.  
Contour of camera  
tampering object  
Note  
5
Object size indicator  
Detection will not be possible for three seconds after the change  
ratio is modified when camera tampering detection is selected, or  
when switching into camera tampering detection from another  
detection mode.  
Detect criteria for [Passing Detection]  
Set the passing direction and decision point of the moving  
object for the detection line that the moving object will  
cross.  
Important  
Perform a detection test in advance to make sure that the  
detection frame continues to be displayed for a subject  
targeted for passing detection.  
Note  
• A ratio of up to 30% can be set for [Object Size (%)] in passing  
detection.  
• A passing detection event is notified only when the decision  
line is crossed. Take care in setting the operation to be  
performed when an event occurs.  
[Passing Direction]  
Select the direction for moving objects to pass the  
detection line. When an object that moves in the selected  
direction passes the detection line, “line crossed” is  
detected.  
A preview display shows the selected passing direction  
on the detection line in the video display area.  
Setting by Right-Click Menu  
Right-click on the Intelligent Function Setting Tool display  
screen to display the menu. There, the following functions  
can be used.  
[Copy detection area/line]  
Copy the detection area/line of the detection setting  
selected.  
[Decision Point]  
Select the decision point of a moving object in  
accordance with a detection line. When a decision point  
selected here crosses the detection line, “line crossed” is  
detected. In the video display area, a cross mark is  
displayed to indicate the decision point in the detection  
frame.  
[Paste detection area/line]  
Paste the copied detection area/line to the detection  
setting selected. It cannot be copied to camera tampering  
detection. Pasting a detection line is possible only when  
the source and the target both set passing detection.  
[Clear detection area/line]  
Clear the detection area/line of the detection setting  
selected. It cannot be cleared in camera tampering  
detection.  
Detection frame  
[Copy detection criteria settings]  
Copy the detection criteria of the detection setting  
selected.  
Decision point  
Detection line  
[Paste detection criteria settings]  
Paste the copied detection criteria to the detection setting  
selected. Pasting is possible only if the source and the  
target are the same detection type.  
[Object Size (%)]  
Enter or use the slider to set the size ratio of moving  
objects for the entire screen.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[Copy event settings]  
Copy the event operations of the detection setting  
selected.  
Note  
If the detection setting is not stored in the camera, only the  
detection status for the currently selected detection setting is  
displayed.  
[Paste event settings]  
Paste the copied event operations to the detection setting  
selected.  
Reducing effects of lighting change  
Intelligent functions may not work when the entire screen  
is exposed to sudden changes in brightness, for example,  
when indoor lights are turned on or off. Changing the  
detection settings may reduce this effect.  
Click [Detection Settings].  
1
Select [Reduce effects of lighting change].  
2
Click [Save settings].  
3
Important  
A [Reduce effects of lighting change] setting may not work  
depending on the operating environment. Sudden changes in  
brightness that persist may also have the same effect. Perform  
a detection test to check what will work.  
Note  
Since changing [Detection Settings] restarts the intelligent  
functions, detection will not be performed during the tens of  
seconds that it takes to complete a restart.  
Displaying Event Status  
Click the [Event Display] button to open the event display  
panel and confirm the detection status icon of the  
intelligent functions.  
This panel displays the same information as [Intelligent  
Function (Image Detection)] in the event display panel of  
the Admin Viewer. For details, see “Displaying Event  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Log Viewer  
This tool lets you view the operating condition log of the camera.  
Display Screens of Log Viewer  
5
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
(6)  
(7)  
(8)  
(9)  
(10)  
(12)  
(11)  
(13)  
(14)  
(15)  
(16)  
(17)  
(18)  
(1) [Download]  
Download log files from this camera or memory cards.  
From files saved to a computer:  
File name  
(2) [Reload]  
(8) [Copy]  
Reload the displayed log file and show the latest logs.  
Copy to the clipboard logs that you have selected on  
the log display area.  
(3) [Previous File]  
If there are multiple log files in the camera's internal  
memory or memory card, load and display the file  
before the currently shown log list.  
(9) [Select all]  
Select all the logs that are shown in the log display  
area.  
(4) [Next File]  
(10)[Show all logs] checkbox  
If there are multiple log files in the internal memory or  
memory card, load and display the file after the  
currently shown log list.  
When selected, all logs, including those without a log  
code, are shown.  
(11)Log display area  
(5) [Open local file]  
The content of log files downloaded from the camera,  
memory card, or computer is shown.  
Load log files that are saved on a computer to the log  
display area.  
(12)[Log Type]  
(6) [Save to local file]  
Select log types you want to show using the filter  
function.  
[Not specified]:  
Save the displayed log data as a text file to a  
computer.  
Select to show all log types.  
[Specify type]:  
(7) [Source]  
The name of the source from where log files are  
loaded is shown.  
From the camera's internal memory:  
Camera (Internal memory)  
To specify the log type, select the level ([Error],  
[Warning], [Information]) and output module  
([Application], [HTTP Server], [System]) of the log.  
Multiple checkboxes can be selected.  
[Specify code]:  
From a memory card:  
Camera (Memory card)  
Logs matching the entered log code are shown.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
(13)[Date & Time]  
Downloading Log Files  
Set the date and time of the log you want to show  
using the filter function.  
Select the [Specify start date & time] or [Specify end  
date & time] checkbox to set the date and time.  
When Log Viewer is launched, the latest log files will be  
downloaded and displayed automatically.  
To download a new log file list, click [Download]. A  
[Download] dialog box is shown where you can select  
[Internal memory] or [Memory Card] as a download  
source.  
When the list has been downloaded, a dialog box  
showing the log file list opens. Select the log file you want  
to view and click [Download], and the selected log file will  
be downloaded.  
(14)[Apply filter]  
Show the filtered logs in the log display area.  
(15)[Search for]  
Enter the character string for which you want to  
search.  
(16)[Match case] checkbox  
Specify whether or not to enable case sensitivity in  
search commands. When selected, character strings  
perfectly matching the case in the [Search for] field  
are searched.  
(17)[Previous]/[Next]  
Click [Next] to move down and [Previous] to move up  
in the search results for (18) [Search].  
(18)[Search]  
Search logs containing the character string searched  
in the displayed log list and display them.  
Note  
Logs cannot be deleted in the Log viewer.  
How to View Logs  
The log contains the following information.  
Code  
For the log code, see “List of Log Messages” (p. 148).  
The log code is shown together with one of three icons  
corresponding to the applicable level.  
If the log has no log code, no icon is shown.  
Error Level  
Warning Level  
Information Level  
Date & Time  
The date and time at which the log was generated.  
Message  
A message regarding the log.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Log Viewer  
Set the following conditions and click [Apply filter] to show  
only the logs matching the specified conditions.  
Saving a Log to a File/Opening a Saved Log  
How to Save  
Click [Save to local file] and save using the [Save As]  
dialog box.  
How to View  
Click [Open local file] and select a log file using the  
[Open] dialog box.  
5
Copying/Searching Logs  
How to Copy  
Click to select the log you want to copy, and then click  
[Copy].  
[Log Type]  
Select the [Specify type] or [Specify code] checkbox to  
filter logs by type. If you do not want to filter logs by type,  
select [Not specified].  
How to Search  
Enter the character string for which you want to search in  
[Search for] and click [Search].  
If the searched log is found, it is shown as selected.  
Click [Previous] or [Next] to search the log above or  
below. Lines of logs found are shown as selected.  
Specify type  
Specify the log level  
Select [Error], [Warning] or [Information] for the level of  
logs to be shown.  
Specify log output module  
Select [Application], [HTTP Server] or [System] for the  
output source module whose logs will be displayed.  
Specify code  
Specify the log code. Only logs whose code contains  
the entered characters are shown. If “A0” is entered,  
for example, logs starting with “A0” are displayed.  
Showing All Logs  
[Date & Time]  
Select the [Show all logs] checkbox.  
[Specify start date & time] checkbox  
When selected, even logs without a log code are shown if  
[Not specified] is selected for the log type [Filter].  
When this checkbox is selected and a date and time  
are entered, logs generated on or after the specified  
date and time are shown.  
[Specify end date & time] checkbox  
Showing Filtered Logs  
When this checkbox is selected and a date and time  
are entered, logs generated on or before the specified  
date and time are shown.  
You can filter logs by type, code and date & time to show  
only the necessary information.  
Important  
Logs saved in the camera's internal memory are cleared when  
you perform [Maintenance] > [Restore Default Settings] and  
[Reboot], or press the reset switch on the camera.  
Note  
[Application], [HTTP Server], and [System] support the List of  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Recorded Video Utility  
This utility manages video recorded on a memory card. It allows you to play back recorded video and download it to a  
computer, display a video list or perform filtering.  
Display Screens of Recorded Video Utility  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(7)  
(4)  
(5)  
(6)  
(8)  
(13)  
(9)  
(10)  
(11)  
(12)  
(1) [Refresh Video List]  
(10)[Download]  
Update the video list to the current state.  
Download videos selected in the video list to a  
computer.  
(2) [Refresh Download Status]  
Update video download status to the current state.  
(11)[Download to]  
Specify the folder that videos are downloaded to.  
(3) [Memory Card Details]  
Displays the dialog box for details about the memory  
card.  
(12)[Filter]  
Click [Filter] to open or close the filter area. Sets  
criteria to narrow down the number of items displayed  
in the video list (p. 113).  
(4) [Number of Videos]  
Displays the number of videos in the video list.  
(13)[Playback Videos] Area  
(5) [Select All]  
Plays videos selected in the video list (p. 114).  
Select all video in the video list.  
(6) [Export to mov format]  
Export the [Downloaded] video selected in the video  
list to a mov format video file.  
(7) [Enable H.264 playback] checkbox  
Select to play H.264 video in the [Playback Videos]  
(8) Video List  
Displays a list of videos recorded on a memory card  
and downloaded to a computer.  
(9) [Delete from Camera]  
Delete videos selected in the video list from the  
memory card.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Recorded Video Utility  
Confirming Recorded Video  
5
Click [Select All] to select all videos on the list.  
The video list displays the following information:  
[Date & Time]  
Displays the date and time of a video recording.  
Narrowing Down the Number of Videos  
Use [Filter] to narrow down the number of videos that  
appear in the video list to the ones you need.  
Set the following conditions and click [Apply filter] to show  
only the videos matching the specified conditions.  
[Format]  
Displays the format of a recorded video ([JPEG] or  
[H.264]).  
[Recording Type]  
Displays the type of recorded video ([Upload],  
[Recording-Mode Stream], [Manual], [Timer], [Event]).  
[Upload] indicates videos that failed to upload from the  
camera, and [Recording-Mode Stream] indicates videos  
where video transmission failed when using RM  
recording-mode stream.  
[Video in Camera]  
Displays whether or not any video remains on a memory  
card. When video has been deleted from a memory card  
after downloading it, this indicator displays [No].  
[Date & Time]  
[Specify start date & time] checkbox  
When this checkbox is selected and a date and time  
are entered, videos recorded on or after the specified  
date and time are shown.  
[Download Status]  
Displays download status of video ([Downloaded], [Not  
Downloaded], [Partially Downloaded]).  
[Specify end date & time] checkbox  
Note  
When this checkbox is selected and a date and time  
are entered, videos recorded on or before the  
specified date and time are shown.  
Clicking a header in each column sorts the video list.  
[Video Format]  
Refreshing Video List  
Select [Specified] and select the checkboxes for the  
video format ([JPEG] or [H.264]) (multiple selections  
possible).  
Click [Refresh Video List] to update the video list to the  
current state.  
[Recording Type]  
Click [Refresh Download Status] to update download  
status of the video list to the current state.  
Select [Specified] and select the checkboxes for the type  
of video recording ([Upload], [Recording-Mode Stream],  
[Manual], [Timer], [Event]) (multiple selections possible).  
Selecting Videos  
[Video in Camera]  
Click a video to select it. Use the Ctrl key or the Shift key  
while clicking to select multiple videos.  
Select [Not specified], [Yes] or [No].  
[Download Status]  
Select [Specified] and select the checkboxes for the  
status of video download ([Downloaded], [Not  
Downloaded], [Partially Downloaded]) (multiple selections  
possible).  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Click [Export to mov format].  
Downloading Video  
2
3
The [Browse For Folder] dialog box appears.  
Select a folder to export to and click [OK].  
The video is exported.  
Download video recorded on a memory card to a  
computer.  
Specify the folder to download video to in [Download  
to].  
1
Note  
Click [Browse] to specify a folder.  
• The exported video files can be played back using QuickTime  
7.7 and Windows Media Player 11/12. For Windows Vista and  
earlier, use QuickTime. However, playback when using this  
software is not guaranteed.  
Select a video to download in the video list.  
2
• A recorded JPEG video whose size is changed during  
recording and exported to a mov file cannot be played back by  
Windows Media Player. Use QuickTime to play it back.  
Click [Download].  
3
The video is downloaded to the specified folder.  
Important  
Playing Back Videos  
Since the Recorded Video Utility processes both files  
downloaded to a computer and its original videos recorded on  
the memory card, the video list will not display correctly if files  
downloaded to a computer are manually deleted. In this case,  
click [Refresh Download Status] to refresh status of data  
downloaded to a computer.  
Videos selected in the video list can be played back in the  
[Playback Videos] area.  
The appearance and operations of the [Playback Videos]  
area differ depending on the selected video format.  
Note  
For JPEG  
When the download folder is changed, the download status of the  
files in the download folder prior to the change becomes [Not  
Downloaded]. Manually copy the files in the download folder  
prior to the change to the new download folder to change their  
status to [Downloaded].  
Downloaded videos are stored in a folder that is automatically  
created within the specified destination folder and named using  
the camera IP address (for example, [192.168.100.1]). Quit the  
Recorded Video Utility before using explorer to browse the  
folders before and after the change and copy the contents of the  
folder with the same name as the camera IP address.  
After copying, start up the Recorded Video Utility, click [Refresh  
Download Status] and the manually copied files will appear in the  
video list.  
For details on the folder configuration and file naming rules for  
the download location, see “Directory Structure for Data  
[Recording Date & Time]  
Displays the date and time of video frames that are being  
displayed.  
Exporting to Video Files That Can Be  
Played Back  
[Playback Frame No.]  
Displays frame numbers and total number of video frames  
that are being displayed.  
Videos downloaded from a memory card to a computer  
can be exported to video files that can be played back on  
a computer.  
For H.264 video, subdivided files are merged into a single  
file.  
[Playback Interval]  
[Real Time]  
JPEG video is played back in real time interval  
according to the recording time. The preceding JPEG  
video appears in an empty frame.  
Select a video to export in the video list.  
[Equal Interval]  
JPEG video is played back at a 1-second interval.  
1
Videos whose [Download Status] is labeled  
[Downloaded] in the video list can be exported.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Recorded Video Utility  
Note  
• [Real Time] can be selected only for playback of downloaded  
videos.  
• [Not Downloaded] or [Partially Downloaded] videos may not be  
played back in the order they were recorded.  
Slider/Playback Control  
5
Drag the slider to change playback position.  
The following buttons can also be used for playback.  
Button  
Description  
[Recording Date & Time]  
Displays the date and time of video frames that are being  
displayed.  
Move to first frame  
[Playback File No.]  
Displays file numbers and total number of video files that  
are being displayed.  
Move to previous frame  
Fast rewind  
Note  
Playback  
• The H.264 video playback interval varies depending on the  
download status.  
Pause  
If the download status is [Downloaded], each frame is played  
back in real time interval according to the recording time. For  
empty frames, the preceding frame is displayed.  
Fast forward  
If the status is [Not Downloaded] or [Partially Downloaded],  
empty frames are skipped upon playback. If a file is played  
back while still downloading, playback may momentarily pause  
when switching files, depending on the network environment.  
Move to next frame  
Move to last frame  
• [Not Downloaded] or [Partially Downloaded] videos may not be  
played back in the order they were recorded.  
[Save Playback Frame As]  
Video frames that are being played back can be saved as  
a separate file.  
Slider/Playback Control  
For H.264  
Select the [Enable H.264 playback] checkbox to play  
H.264 video in the [Playback Videos] area.  
The Software Product License Agreement dialog box  
appears. Click [Yes] to accept the terms of the license  
agreement. The decoder is downloaded from the camera,  
enabling H.264 video playback.  
Drag the slider to change playback position.  
The following buttons can also be used for playback.  
Button  
Description  
Move to first frame  
Move to previous frame  
Playback  
Pause  
Move to next frame  
Move to last frame  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[Save Playback Frame As]  
Video frames that are being displayed can be saved as a  
separate file.  
Clear the [Enable H.264 playback] checkbox to play  
H.264 video in an external player.  
[Number of downloaded video files]  
The number of downloaded files the video consist of is  
displayed.  
[Playback with External Player]  
Start up the external player (Windows Media Player, etc.)  
and the selected video is played back.  
[Open Video folder]  
Open the folder storing the selected video. Double click  
the video file in the folder to play it back.  
Note  
• When the data size for mov type files is 1 MB or greater, they  
are split into several files.  
• If mov files are split into several files, only the initial few  
seconds of the first file can be played back.  
• The downloaded video files can be played back using  
QuickTime 7.7 and Windows Media Player 11/12. For the  
Windows Vista operating system or earlier, use QuickTime.  
Use of these applications does not guarantee playback.]  
Deleting Videos  
You can delete videos from a memory card.  
Select a video to delete in the video list.  
1
Click [Delete from Camera].  
2
The video is deleted from the camera.  
Note  
If the selected videos contain [Not Downloaded] videos, a  
message prompting you to confirm deletion appears. Click [OK]  
to delete the video.  
Displaying Memory Card Information  
Click [Memory Card Details] to display information on the  
memory card inserted in the camera.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Control for Admin  
This panel is used to adjust video from the camera that is  
displayed by each Admin Tool. The panel is available to  
the Privacy Mask Setting Tool, View Restriction Setting  
Tool, Preset Setting Tool and Intelligent Function Setting  
Tool.  
Operating the Control Items  
The panel operates in the same way as Control for Admin  
of the Admin Viewer.  
5
Using Control for Admin  
Click the [Control for Admin] button to display the Control  
for Admin Panel.  
Opening/Closing Control Items  
Clicking the title of a control item will open or close the  
setting items.  
[Smart Shade Control]  
You can set Smart Shade Control. For details, see “Setting  
[Focus]  
You can adjust focus. For details, see “Setting the Focus”  
(p. 135).  
[Exposure]  
You can adjust exposure. For details, see “Setting the  
Note  
The Admin Control Panel will appear and you can open  
the various control items even without obtaining the  
camera control privileges, but the items will be grayed  
out.  
The items for the Intelligent Function Setting Tool’s Control for  
Admin will be grayed out if the [Lock camera position] checkbox  
is selected (p. 101) in the Intelligent Function Setting Tool.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
6
Admin Viewer/VB Viewer  
Differences between the Admin Viewer and the VB Viewer  
User Authorities and Camera Control Privileges  
Viewer Startup and Operation  
Camera Control and Obtaining Camera Control Privileges  
Admin Viewer Operation and Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Overview of Viewer  
Accessing this viewer via a web browser allows you to display video and operate the camera.  
Two types of viewer are available, the Admin Viewer and the VB Viewer.  
Admin Viewer  
VB Viewer  
Major Differences Between the Admin  
Viewer and the VB Viewer  
User Authorities and Camera Control  
Privileges  
The operable ranges differ between the viewers.  
Admin Viewer:  
User authorities and their relative camera control  
privileges are specified as follows.  
Users can use the administrative control functions,  
such as shooting adjustment settings or event  
detection display.  
Camera Control Privileges  
User  
Authority  
Video  
Audio  
Privileged  
Camera  
Control  
Camera  
Control  
Distribution Distribution  
VB Viewer:  
This viewer is limited to basic video operations for  
viewing video.  
Administrator  
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Authorized  
user  
(Can be  
changed)  
(Can be  
changed)  
(Can be  
changed) changed)  
(Can be  
Accessible controls are different.  
Admin Viewer:  
{
{
{
Users with privileged camera control can use this  
viewer.  
Password authentication is required.  
Authorized users must have privileged camera  
control assigned by the Administrator beforehand  
Guest user  
×
(Can be  
changed)  
(Can be  
changed) changed)  
(Can be  
* Can be changed: The Administrator can change the  
privileges of Authorized Users and Guest Users (p. 60).  
The four authorities that can be set for users are privileged  
camera control, camera control, video distribution and  
audio distribution.  
Users must have privileged camera control to use the  
Admin Viewer.  
Users must have the video distribution authority to display  
video using the VB Viewer. To operate the camera using  
the VB Viewer, users must also have camera control  
authority.  
VB Viewer:  
Users with camera control authority can use this  
viewer. You can set the applicable options to  
enable/disable authentication, etc.  
Audio distribution authority is required to receive audio  
using the Admin Viewer and the VB Viewer.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Overview of Viewer  
[Administrator]  
Important  
This user is given all authorities. The user name is fixed  
to “root”.  
• At any time, the [Administrator] can launch the Admin Viewer to  
override the camera control privileges of another instance of  
the Admin Viewer launched by an [Authorized User]. The  
Administrator can retain the camera control privileges, but  
doing so prevents authorized users from obtaining camera  
control privileges. After viewing the necessary information, the  
Administrator should always close the viewer or click [Obtain/  
Release Camera Control] to release the control privileges.  
The Administrator can launch the Admin Viewer from  
the [Admin Viewer] link on the top page.  
[Authorized User]  
Authorized users can launch the Admin Viewer from  
the [Admin Viewer] link on the top page if they have  
privileged camera control. Authorized users can no  
longer launch the Admin Viewer upon losing privileged  
camera control. However, they can still launch the VB  
Viewer. Launching the VB Viewer can be prohibited by  
disabling all authorities of a given authorized user  
(p. 60).  
• The Admin Viewer launched by the [Administrator] can access  
only one camera at a time. While administrator authorities are  
used to access the camera from a given computer, access  
with administrator authorities from other computers will be not  
be granted. In contrast, the camera can be accessed  
simultaneously by multiple instances of the Admin Viewer  
launched by [Authorized Users] from different computers.  
Take note, however, that when controlling the camera, the  
control privileges are given to the user who accessed the  
camera most recently.  
6
[Guest User]  
This user can only use the following functions:  
Backlight compensation, snapshots, video display,  
audio distribution  
Pan/tilt/zoom camera control  
Digital PTZ  
Note  
Guest users can launch the VB Viewer from the [VB  
Viewer] link on the top page. The Administrator can  
completely prohibit all camera access from guest users  
by disabling all their authorities.  
• The factory default setting gives privileged camera control to  
[Authorized User] as well.  
• If all guest user authorities are disabled, the user  
authentication dialog box will appear when the VB Viewer is  
launched. When an authorized user or administrator name and  
password are entered, the VB Viewer can be used with  
authorized user or administrator authorities, respectively.  
• The authorities of authorized users are assigned as follows.  
List of Authorized User Authorities  
Provided controls  
Viewer  
Admin  
Viewer  
Operations  
Privileged Camera  
Control  
All operations possible in the Admin Viewer.  
[Details]  
Camera Control  
Video Distribution  
Audio Distribution  
Video size, video display size, full screen mode, reconnect, audio reception, back  
light compensation, get a snapshot, memory card insert status, event display, viewer  
PTZ* , Control for Admin (smart shade control, exposure, white balance, day/night,  
1
external device output, image quality adjustment, video reception), preset selection,  
home position  
Control for Admin (focus)  
Pan/tilt/zoom, panorama display, Control for Admin (camera PTZ operation  
and speed setting)  
Digital PTZ  
VB Viewer  
VB Viewer  
All operations possible in the VB Viewer.  
[Details]  
Video size, video display size, full screen mode, reconnect, audio reception, back  
light compensation, get a snapshot, preset selection, home position  
Pan/tilt/zoom, panorama display  
Digital PTZ  
Camera Control  
Video Distribution  
Audio Distribution  
All operations possible in the VB Viewer.  
[Details]  
Video size, video display size, full screen mode, reconnect, audio reception, back  
light compensation, get a snapshot, preset selection, home position  
Pan/tilt/zoom, panorama display  
Digital PTZ  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Video Distribution  
Audio Distribution  
VB Viewer  
VB Viewer  
Video size, video display size, full screen mode, reconnect, audio reception, get a  
snapshot  
Panorama display  
Digital PTZ  
2
Video Distribution*  
Video size, video display size, full screen mode, reconnect, get a snapshot  
Panorama display  
Digital PTZ  
*1 PTZ: Pan, tilt, zoom  
*2 If video distribution authority is disabled, users can no longer use VB Viewer.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Launching the Viewer  
The viewer is launched.  
Launching the Viewer  
Important  
• The Admin Tools Certificate must be installed on a computer  
that is using the Admin Viewer. (p. 26)  
• This Operation Guide explains relevant operations based on  
the IP address “192.168.100.1” (factory default setting). You  
must enter the actual IP address set for the camera when  
following instructions.  
6
Access “http://192.168.100.1/” via the web browser.  
1
Shutting Down the Viewer  
Click [Admin Viewer] or [VB Viewer] according to the  
user.  
2
Close the web browser in the viewer to shut down.  
Connecting from Admin Tools  
Only the administrator can connect to this viewer.  
Launch Admin Tools.  
1
(Refer to “Launching the Admin Tools(p. 78) for  
information on launching the Admin Tools.)  
Click [Admin Viewer].  
2
For [Admin Viewer], enter the user name and  
password.  
3
Authentication” (p. 32) for information on the user  
name and password.  
Note  
In environments without a proxy server, select [Internet options] >  
[Connections] tab > [LAN settings] and clear the [Automatically  
detect settings] checkbox in Internet Explorer.  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
How to Operate the Viewer  
Display Screens of Admin Viewer  
The following gives an overview of the functions of buttons, boxes and other screen elements displayed in the Admin  
Viewer.  
The following screen shows the Admin Viewer with all panels opened. In practice, you only open panels that are necessary,  
and can put them anywhere desired in the web browser.  
(2)  
(3)  
(9) (7)  
(4) (5) (6)(10)(11)  
(29)  
(30)  
(31)  
(1)  
(8)  
(12)  
(22)  
(23)  
(24)  
(13) (15)  
(14) (16)  
(17) (19)  
(18) (20)  
(32)  
(33)  
(17) (18)  
(21) (20)  
(27)  
(25)  
(26)  
(28)  
(1) Video Display Area  
Displays video received from the camera.  
(7) Slider for tilt  
This slider is used to control the tilt (vertical  
movement) of the camera.  
(2) Video Size  
Set the size and format of video received from the  
camera.  
(8) Slider for pan  
This slider is used to control the pan (horizontal  
movement) of the camera.  
(3) Video Display Size  
Set the display size of the video shown on the screen.  
(9) Slider for zoom  
This slider is used to control the zoom ratio.  
You can zoom in (telephoto) by moving the knob  
upwards or zoom out (wide-angle) by moving the  
knob downwards.  
(4) [Full Screen Mode] button  
Live video is shown in full screen mode.  
(5) [Reconnect] button  
The camera is reconnected.  
(10)[BLC] (Back Light Compensation) button  
This button turns on/off backlight compensation. This  
control is effective when the video is dark due to  
backlight.  
(6) [Audio Reception] button  
Displays the Receive Audio panel.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
How to Operate the Viewer  
(11)[Obtain/Release Camera Control] button  
This button is used to obtain/release the camera  
control privileges.  
(27)Digital PTZ Panel  
This panel is displayed upon clicking the [Digital PTZ]  
button.  
(12)Information Field  
(28)Digital PTZ Area Designator  
Specify the area in the video display area to crop with  
Digital PTZ.  
Information messages, warning messages and error  
messages are shown to the user.  
(13)[Get a Snapshot] button  
(29)[Setting Page]  
A still image from the moment of clicking is displayed  
in a new window.  
The screen switches to the Settings Menu page.  
(30)[Back to top]  
(14)Memory Card Insert Status Icon  
Displays whether or not the memory card is mounted.  
Memory card is mounted.  
The screen switches to the top page of the camera.  
(31)Control for Admin Panel  
6
You can operate the camera with the administrator  
authorities. For details, see “Using Control for Admin”  
(p. 134).  
Memory card is not mounted.  
(15)[Start/Stop Memory Card Recording] button  
Recording to the memory card starts if you have  
camera control privileges. Click again to stop  
recording.  
(32)Viewer PTZ Panel  
This panel is displayed upon clicking the [Viewer PTZ]  
button.  
(16)[Recorded Video Utility] button  
The Recorded Video Utility (p. 112) of the Admin Tools  
starts up.  
(33)Viewer PTZ Area Designator  
Set the cropped area in the video display area.  
(17)[Event Display] button  
The event display panel is displayed.  
VB Viewer  
(18)[Viewer PTZ] button  
(6)  
(11) (9) (4)(5)  
(2)  
(3)  
(8)  
The viewer PTZ panel is displayed.  
(19)[Panorama Display] button  
The panorama display panel is displayed.  
(1)  
(20)[Control for Admin] button  
Displays the Control for Admin Panel.  
(12)  
(7)  
(21)[Digital PTZ] button  
(10)  
(13)  
(15)  
(16)  
The Digital PTZ panel is displayed.  
(14)  
(22)Preset selection box  
(17)  
(18)  
(19)  
You can control the camera with presets registered in  
the camera beforehand.  
(20)  
(21)  
(22)  
(23)[Home Position] button  
Move the camera angle to the home position.  
(24)Event Display Panel  
This panel is displayed upon clicking the [Event  
Display] button.  
The panel shows the input status of external devices  
and the status of video and volume detection by  
intelligent functions.  
(25)Panorama Display Panel  
(1) Video Display Area  
Displays video received from the camera.  
This panel is displayed upon clicking the [Panorama  
Display] button.  
(2) Video Size  
(26)Panorama Display Area  
Set the size of video received from the camera.  
Displays panorama images registered in the camera.  
You can operate the camera by controlling the frame  
lines within the panorama display area.  
(3) Video Display Size  
Set the display size of the video shown on the screen.  
(4) [Full Screen Mode] button  
Live video is shown in full screen mode.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
(5) [Reconnect] button  
(21)Digital PTZ Panel  
The camera is reconnected.  
This panel is displayed upon clicking the [Digital PTZ]  
button.  
(6) [Audio Reception] button  
Displays the Receive Audio panel.  
(22)Digital PTZ Area Designator  
Specify the area in the video display area to crop with  
Digital PTZ.  
(7) Control Privilege Status Indicator  
Whether or not the current client has camera control  
privileges is shown in this area.  
(8) [Obtain/Release Camera Control] button  
This button is used to obtain and release the camera  
control privileges.  
Obtaining Camera Control Privileges  
The camera cannot be controlled by multiple users  
simultaneously. Only the user with the control privileges  
can control the camera. To perform backlight  
compensation camera control, you must obtain control  
privileges first.  
(9) Slider for tilt  
This slider is used to control the tilt (vertical  
movement) of the camera.  
(10)Slider for pan  
This slider is used to control the pan (horizontal  
movement) of the camera.  
How to Operate  
Click the [Obtain/Release Camera Control] button to  
obtain the control privileges.  
(11)Slider for zoom  
This slider is used to control the zoom ratio.  
You can zoom in (telephoto) by moving the knob  
upwards or zoom out (wide-angle) by moving the  
knob downwards.  
Admin Viewer  
VB Viewer  
Camera Control  
Privilege Display  
Displays camera  
control privilege  
status.  
(12)[BLC] (Back Light Compensation) button  
This button turns on/off backlight compensation. This  
control is effective when the video is dark due to  
backlight.  
(13)Information Field  
[Obtain/Release Camera Control]  
button  
This button is used to obtain/release the  
camera control privileges.  
Information messages, warning messages and error  
messages are shown to the user.  
(14)[Get a Snapshot] button  
A still image from the moment of clicking is displayed  
in a new window.  
Camera Control Privilege Status Indicator  
(15)[Panorama Display] button  
Display of the camera control buttons and camera control  
status indicator changes according to the status of control  
privileges shown as follows.  
The panorama display panel is displayed.  
(16)[Digital PTZ] button  
The Digital PTZ panel is displayed.  
Control privileges not assigned  
(17)Preset selection box  
With the VB Viewer, the control privilege status  
indicator appears in gray and an animated  
[Obtain/Release Camera Control] button is  
displayed.  
You can control the camera with presets registered in  
the camera beforehand.  
(18)[Home Position] button  
Move the camera angle to the home position.  
The Admin Viewer does not display a control  
privilege status indicator. The [Obtain/Release  
Camera Control] button is grayed out.  
(19)Panorama Display Panel  
This panel is displayed upon clicking the [Panorama  
Display] button.  
Waiting for control privileges  
(20)Panorama Display Area  
When waiting for control privileges in the VB  
Viewer, the remaining standby time is shown  
on the control privilege status indicator.  
Displays panorama images registered in the camera.  
You can operate the camera by controlling the frame  
lines within the panorama display area.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
How to Operate the Viewer  
in the center with one click, align the mouse pointer and  
click again until the desired position is displayed in the  
center.  
Control privileges assigned  
(restricted time counting down)  
If another user is waiting for control privileges  
while you are assigned control privileges,  
your remaining time is shown on the control  
privilege status indicator.  
Video Display Area  
This slider is used to control  
the tilt (vertical movement)  
of the camera.  
Control privileges assigned  
The control privilege status indicator is shown  
in blue.  
The [Obtain/Release Camera Control] button  
in the VB Viewer is blue in the center.  
This slider is used to control  
the pan (horizontal  
movement) of the camera.  
6
The [Obtain/Release Camera Control] button  
in the Admin Viewer is yellow green in the  
center.  
Note  
In the Admin Viewer, you can also control the pan and tilt with the  
camera control button (p. 134).  
Change the Camera Angle in the Panorama  
Controlling the Camera  
Display Area  
Obtain camera control privileges before carrying out the  
following operations. These operations can be carried out  
in both the Admin Viewer and the VB Viewer.  
Click the [Panorama Display] button.  
1
Change the camera angle in the panorama display  
area.  
2
Important  
The estimated pan and tilt operational durability is 50,000 full  
cycle operations. For example, 25 full cycles made per day  
would result in 6 years of operation.  
The focus and zoom may also operate abnormally if the pan  
and tilt operational durability estimates are exceeded.  
The frame lines within the display area show the  
image currently being captured by the camera.  
Blue frame lines mean that you do not have camera  
control privileges.  
Yellow frame lines mean that you have camera  
control privileges.  
Note  
• Operations carried out by clicking or dragging will not be  
precise.  
• Users operating the camera in the Admin Viewer with the  
administrator authorities can control the camera outside the  
view restrictions.  
Users operating the camera in the Admin Viewer with the  
authorized user authorities can control the camera only within  
the view restrictions.  
Move by clicking  
Clicking a point in the panorama window moves the pan  
and tilt to center on that point.  
• Users operating the camera in the VB Viewer can control the  
camera within the view restrictions.  
Move by dragging  
Dragging the yellow frame lines in the panorama window  
moves the pan and tilt to capture that area.  
Changing the Camera Angle  
You can change the angle by doing one of the following:  
Note  
Clicking outside the yellow frame lines and dragging will create  
blue frame lines. When you release the mouse button, the blue  
lines will turn yellow and the camera will change the pan, tilt and  
zoom in order to capture that area.  
Use the pan and tilt sliders  
The camera angle will change according to the knob  
position on the sliders. The knob can also be moved by  
clicking on an empty part of the slider.  
Click on the video  
When you click on the video display area, the camera  
angle changes so that the clicked position becomes the  
center of the video. If the desired position is not displayed  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Changing the Camera Zoom Ratio  
Using the Preset/Home Position  
You can control the camera using presets and home  
position registered in the camera beforehand (p. 90).  
Click the preset selection box and select a preset from the  
displayed list to go to the selected preset camera angle.  
Click the [Home Position] button to move the camera  
angle to the home position.  
Move the knob on the slider up or down to zoom in or out  
The camera zoom ratio will change according to the knob  
position on the slider. The knob can also be moved by  
clicking on an empty part of the slider.  
Maximum telephoto  
digital zoom  
(only when digital zoom is  
on)  
Maximum telephoto  
Slider for zoom  
Move the knob upwards to  
zoom in (telephoto)  
Move the knob downwards  
to zoom out (wide-angle)  
[Home Position] button  
Preset selection box  
Maximum Wide Angle  
Note  
Note  
• In the Admin Viewer, you can also control the zoom with the  
Camera Control button (p. 134).  
Register presets and home position beforehand using the Preset  
Setting Tool (p. 92). Registered presets will appear in the preset  
selection box.  
• If [Digital Zoom] is set to [Enable] in [Camera] on the Setting  
page, the icon for the digital zoom telephoto end is displayed.  
Compensating Backlight  
This control is effective when the video is dark due to  
backlight.  
• Zoom refers to digital zoom only.  
Clicking [BLC] brightens video that is dark due to  
backlight.  
Clicking the button again cancels backlight  
compensation.  
Change the Zoom Ratio in the Panorama  
Display Area  
Click the [Panorama Display] button.  
1
Change the zoom ratio in the panorama display area  
displayed.  
2
Cropping and Displaying Part of Video  
(Digital PTZ)  
You can change the zoom ratio by dragging the yellow  
frame lines in the panorama window and changing the  
size of the frame. The zoom ratio will adjust to capture  
the area in the changed frame.  
You can use the Digital PTZ panel to crop and display  
part of a camera video in the video display area. It is also  
possible to use a preset or home position registered to the  
camera.  
Note  
Zoom refers to digital zoom only.  
Digital PTZ  
Digital PTZ is a function that facilitates simple panning,  
tilting, and zooming without changing the camera lens  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
How to Operate the Viewer  
position that was adjusted at the time of installation by  
transmitting just part of the camera effective pixel area  
from the camera to the viewer.  
Note  
• For details on how this function differs from Viewer PTZ, see  
• If digital PTZ is enabled while receiving H.264 video, the  
received video changes to JPEG format.  
Opening the Digital PTZ Panel  
Click the [Digital PTZ] button to display the Digital PTZ  
panel.  
6
Note  
The preview frame size can be set to any of five sizes (the  
changed size is displayed under [Video Size] on the digital PTZ  
panel).  
The sizes that can be selected depend on the [Video Size Set]  
setting under [Video] > [All Videos] on the Setting page (p. 46).  
If the video size set is [1920 x 1080 / 960 x 540 / 480 x 270] or [1280  
x 720 / 640 x 360 / 320 x 180], video sizes 640 x 360, 512 x 288, 384  
x 216, 256 x 144, and 128 x 72 can be selected. The aspect ratio is  
16:9.  
If the video size set is [1280 x 960 / 640 x 480 / 320 x 240], video  
sizes 640 x 480, 512 x 384, 384 x 288, 256 x 192, and 128 x 96  
can be selected. The aspect ratio is 4:3.  
The appearance of the [Digital PTZ] button differs as  
follows depending on the state of the Digital PTZ function.  
Changing the Position  
You can move the preview frame by dragging the inside  
of the frame.  
Digital PTZ is disabled (displays the scene as seen by  
the camera).  
If you click any position in the Digital PTZ display area, the  
preview frame moves to the clicked position.  
Digital PTZ is enabled (displays trimmed video).  
Note  
The preview frame moves in stages. You cannot finely adjust the  
position.  
Specifying a Cropping Range  
Change the position and size of the preview frame on the  
Digital PTZ panel to specify the range to display in the  
video display area.  
The preview frame is blue when you have not obtained  
camera control privileges. When you obtain camera  
control privileges, the preview frame turns yellow and you  
can use the following procedures to resize and move it.  
Specifying a Range with the Sliders  
You can use the pan, tilt, and zoom sliders for the video  
display area to specify the cropping range in the video  
display area. The preview frame on the Digital PTZ panel  
also moves in accordance with the operation of the pan,  
tilt, and zoom sliders.  
Changing the Size  
You can resize the preview frame by dragging it. The  
preview frame turns blue during dragging. The video  
inside the frame is displayed in the video display area in  
accordance with the size of the frame.  
Using a Preset or the Home Position  
You can use a registered preset or home position to  
specify the range for Digital PTZ.  
Click the preset selection box and select a preset from the  
displayed list to move the preview frame on the Digital  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
*2 The H.264 video sizes set in [Video Size] under [Video] >  
[H.264(1)] and [H.264(2)] (p. 46) on the Setting page are  
added to the menu.  
*3 If [H.264(2)] is set to [Enable] under [Video] > [H.264(2)]  
(p. 47) on the Setting page, the video sizes for both [H.264(1)]  
and [H.264(2)] are added to the menu.  
PTZ panel to the preset position and display the video  
inside the frame in the video display area.  
Click the [Home Position] button to move the preview  
frame on the Digital PTZ panel to the home position and  
display the video inside the frame in the video display  
area.  
Note  
Register the preset or home position beforehand using the Preset  
Setting Tool (p. 92). Registered presets will appear in the preset  
selection box.  
Important  
Exiting Digital PTZ  
Click the [Digital PTZ] button again. The Digital PTZ panel  
closes and Digital PTZ ends.  
H.264 video cannot be displayed using VB Viewer.  
Although clicking the close button of the Digital PTZ panel  
closes the Digital PTZ panel, Digital PTZ will stay on.  
Changing the Display Screen Size  
You can change the display screen size.  
The display screen sizes that can be selected depend on  
the [Video Size Set] setting under [Video] > [All Videos] on  
the Setting page (p. 46).  
Setting Video and Audio  
Selectable display  
[Video Size Set] setting  
size  
Actual Pixels  
480 x 270  
960 x 540  
1920 x 1080  
1920 x 1080 / 960 x 540 /  
480 x 270  
Fit to Window  
Actual Pixels  
480 x 270  
640 x 360  
1280 x 720  
1280 x 720 / 640 x 360 /  
320 x 180  
Fit to Window  
Changing the Video Size  
Actual Pixels  
You can set a desired video size for video received from  
the camera.  
The sizes that can be selected depend on the [Video Size  
Set] setting under [Video] > [All Videos] on the Setting  
page (p. 46).  
480 x 360  
640 x 480  
1280 x 960  
Fit to Window  
1280 x 960 / 640 x 480 /  
320 x 240  
[Actual Pixels] displays the video at the size at which it is  
being captured.  
[Fit to Window] displays the video at the maximum size  
possible in the web browser window.  
Selectable video size  
[Video Size Set] setting  
1
JPEG  
H.264*  
480 x 270  
960 x 540  
1920 x 1080  
2
1920 x 1080 / 960 x 540 /  
480 x 270  
*
3
*
320 x 180  
640 x 360  
1280 x 720  
2
1280 x 720 / 640 x 360 /  
320 x 180  
*
3
*
320 x 240  
640 x 480  
1280 x 960  
2
1280 x 960 / 640 x 480 /  
320 x 240  
*
Note  
3
*
• When the VB Viewer is launched, the video size set for the  
camera is applied.  
When the Admin Viewer is launched for the first time, the camera  
settings are applied, but from then on settings from the previous  
time are used.  
*1 When the [Enable H.264 reception] checkbox is checked in  
Admin Viewer > Control for Admin > [Video Reception]  
(p. 139), H.264 video sizes will be added to the menu display.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
How to Operate the Viewer  
• When the viewer is launched, the display screen size opens at  
[Actual Pixels].  
You can move any panel by clicking the title bar and  
dragging it to the desired position.  
Displaying in Full Screen Mode  
Getting a Snapshot  
You can show video over the entire display. Clicking this  
button will switch the viewer to full screen mode.  
Captures a still image from live video and displays it in a  
new window.  
You can also save still images.  
Click [Get a Snapshot] button at the moment you want to  
capture a still image.  
To close the full screen window, select [Exit Full Screen  
Mode] in the following menu.  
You can display the necessary panels for controlling the  
camera in the full screen mode. Right-click on the screen  
and select the necessary panel from the menu that  
appears.  
6
Admin Viewer  
VB Viewer  
A snapshot panel will open showing a still image from the  
moment you clicked it. When the snapshot panel is open,  
click the [Get a Snapshot] button to update the image  
displayed in the snapshot panel.  
To save a still image, right-click on it and select the save  
option from the menu that appears.  
Enter the file name desired and save the image.  
[Start/Stop Control]  
Obtain and release the camera  
control privileges.  
[Preset]  
Select a preset.  
[Home Position]  
Move the camera angle to the  
home position.  
[Panorama]  
Displays the panorama display  
panel.  
[Start/Exit Viewer PTZ] The viewer PTZ panel is  
displayed. (Admin Viewer only)  
[Start/Exit Digital PTZ]  
The Digital PTZ panel is  
displayed.  
Reconnect  
[Control]  
Displays the camera control  
panel.  
[Pan/Tilt Slider]  
[Control for Admin]  
Displays the pan/tilt slider.  
Displays the Control for Admin  
Panel (Admin Viewer only).  
Switch video capture size.  
Get a snapshot.  
To reconnect the camera, click this button.  
Note  
[Video Capture Size]  
[Snapshot]  
If you reconnect, audio reception will stop and camera control  
privileges will be lost.  
[Audio Reception]  
Displays the Receive Audio  
panel.  
Receiving Audio  
[Event Display]  
Displays the event display panel  
(Admin Viewer only).  
You can receive audio through the microphone attached  
to the camera.  
[Start/Stop Memory Card Recording]  
Start and stop video recording to  
a memory card (Admin Viewer  
only).  
[Exit Full Screen Mode] Exit full screen mode.  
Click this button to receive audio.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Select the [Receive audio] checkbox in the Receive Audio  
panel that appears and use the slider to set an  
appropriate volume.  
Checking Information  
Icon  
Meaning  
The following icons will appear depending on the content  
of the information displayed.  
Receiving audio  
Icon (color)  
Meaning  
Description  
Not receiving audio  
Appears when a camera  
operation has been successful.  
The following information  
appears.  
• Help messages, such for each  
button and pull down menu  
• Frame rate information  
Note  
• To receive audio, set [Server] > [Audio Server] > [Audio  
Transmission from the Camera] to [Enable] in the setting pages  
beforehand (p. 54).  
(Blue)  
Information  
Pan, tilt, zoom  
camera information  
• The first time the Receive Audio panel is launched from the VB  
Viewer, a message to install the “Canon Network Camera Audio  
Receiver” add-on will be displayed in the information bar of the web  
browser. Install the add-on.  
Pan, tilt, and  
zoom information for Digital  
PTZ  
• Regardless whether or not the Receive Audio panel is open, audio  
will always be received if the [Receive audio] checkbox is selected  
in the Receive Audio panel.  
A message will appear notifying  
the user when camera control  
privileges cannot be obtained,  
audio reception stops, etc.  
(Yellow) Warning  
Appears when a system error  
occurs.  
(Orange) Error  
Note  
For details on the messages, see “List of Viewer Messages”  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Performing Operations and Settings in the Admin Viewer  
The operations and settings that can be performed only in the Admin Viewer are explained.  
The initial status of the Viewer PTZ panel shows the  
preview frame (yellow) occupying the entire video.  
Magnifying Part of the Video (Viewer PTZ)  
You can use the Viewer PTZ panel to magnify part of the  
camera’s video in the video display area.  
Adjusting the Preview Frame Size  
6
Drag the preview frame line to make the frame smaller,  
and a magnified view of the video in the frame will be  
shown in the video display area.  
Viewer PTZ  
Viewer PTZ uses the digital zoom function to enlarge part  
of a video without using the camera pan, tilt or zoom  
functions.  
This function allows you to enlarge part of a video when  
using the camera in a locked position, for example, during  
use of an intelligent function.  
Important  
When the Viewer PTZ function is used, you cannot operate the  
camera by clicking the video display area.  
Note  
• Video cropped with Viewer PTZ will not be videos recorded  
manually, or by event or timer.  
• The cropped position in the video display area will be reflected  
in full screen mode as well.  
The preview frame turns blue when you drag it.  
Opening the Viewer PTZ Panel  
Note  
Click the [Viewer PTZ] button to display the viewer PTZ  
panel.  
The Viewer PTZ uses digital zoom, so the higher the digital zoom  
ratio, the lower the quality of the video becomes.  
Moving the Preview Frame  
You can move the preview frame to the desired position.  
Move by dragging  
Click within the preview frame and drag it over the subject  
that you want to see magnified.  
The preview frame turns blue when you drag it.  
Move by clicking  
Preview Frame  
(Magnified display area)  
Click a position outside of the preview frame and the  
preview frame will move to that position. Click the subject  
that you want to see magnified.  
Center of preview  
frame  
Move using sliders  
You can pan, tilt and zoom the displayed video using  
sliders.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Opening/Closing and Moving Control Items  
Note  
After changing the preview frame, the video display area will  
continue to display the cropped video corresponding to the  
preview frame even after the Viewer PTZ panel is closed.  
However, when you reconnect to Admin Viewer, the initial status  
will be restored.  
Clicking the title of a control item will open or close it.  
Exiting Viewer PTZ  
Click the [Viewer PTZ] button again. The Viewer PTZ  
panel closes and Viewer PTZ is exited.  
You can open the various control items even without  
obtaining the camera control privileges, but all items other  
than [Video Reception] are not available.  
You can also reorder control items using the up/down  
buttons.  
Differences Between Viewer PTZ and Digital  
PTZ  
Viewer PTZ and Digital PTZ are both simple pan, tilt, and  
zoom functions that use the digital zoom function, but they  
have the following differences because they employ  
different operating principles.  
Viewer PTZ  
Digital PTZ  
Enlarges the specified part of Transmits only the trimmed  
the video transmitted from the part of the entire area that can  
camera and then displays it in be captured by the camera.  
the viewer.  
Performing Operations and Settings  
The size of the received data  
is large.  
The size of the received data  
is small.  
Click the camera control buttons to set the pan, tilt and  
zoom operations as well as the speed.  
Can be used only in Admin  
Viewer.  
Can be used in both Admin  
Viewer and VB Viewer.  
PTZ operation can be  
performed independently for  
each viewer.  
Independent operation cannot  
be performed for each viewer  
(if multiple viewers are  
connected, the same display  
is applied in the other  
viewers).  
(3)  
(1)  
(2)  
Using Control for Admin  
(4)  
When you have obtained control privileges, click the  
[Control for Admin] button to display the Control for Admin  
Panel and perform camera operation and video settings.  
(1) [Pan/Tilt] button  
Move pan and tilt in the direction of the arrows.  
Operation will continue as long as you are holding  
down the button and will stop when you release it.  
Clicking the center button will make the camera face  
straight forwards.  
(2) [Zoom] buttons  
Zooms in or out. Operation will continue as long as  
you are holding down the button and will stop when  
you release it.  
(3) [Pan/Tilt] Speed  
Select a speed from [Fast], [Normal] and [Slow].  
(4) [Zoom] Speed  
Set the speed to [Fast] or [Slow].  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Performing Operations and Settings in the Admin Viewer  
Setting the Focus  
Note  
Changing the [Pan/Tilt] speed or [Zoom] speed will not change  
the speed of the slider, or of the pan, tilt or zoom in panorama.  
Setting the Smart Shade Control  
The smart shade control function differs from backlight  
compensation in that only dark areas are brightened while  
bright areas are kept intact.  
[Auto]  
: Automatically focuses on the  
subject.  
6
[Manual]  
: You can adjust the focus manually  
(1)  
(2)  
by pushing the  
(near) buttons.  
(far) and  
Clicking [One-shot AF] will use  
autofocus to focus on a subject and  
then stop in manual focus.  
(1) [Smart Shade Control]  
Select [Auto], [Manual], or [Disable].  
[Fixed at Infinity] : You can set the focus so that it is  
fixed near infinity.  
(2) Adjusting the Smart Shade Control  
When smart shade control is [Manual], set one of the 7  
levels from [1] (Mild) to [7] (Strong).  
Important  
• If it is set in the Admin Viewer, the same focus mode will  
occur in the viewers of other users also.  
Example: If the background is bright and the subject  
is hard to see, this function brightens dark areas to  
make the subject clearer.  
In comparison to backlight compensation, smart  
shade control can reduce overexposure of bright  
areas.  
• Setting the shutter speed at [1/1 sec] in manual exposure  
(p. 135) will disable the [Auto] and [One-shot AF] focus  
modes in Control for Admin. Switch the focus to [Manual] and  
adjust it to your subject.  
• Refer to the notes on p. 43 for focus ranges.  
• Changes to focus mode in the Admin Viewer will not be  
reflected in the settings on the setting page.  
• Note that if you set the focus manually it will remain fixed.  
OFF  
Smart Shade  
BLC (Back Light  
Compensation)  
Control  
Setting the Exposure  
Important  
• [Auto] cannot be selected for [Smart Shade Control] if  
[Exposure] is set to [Manual].  
(1)  
• The [BLC] button is not available if [Smart Shade Control] is  
set to [Auto].  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
(6)  
Note  
• When [Auto] or [Manual] is selected for smart shade control,  
the video data size increases.  
• When [Manual] is selected for smart shade control, setting a  
high compensation strength may increase screen noise. If  
noise is noticeable, lower the control level.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
(1) Exposure Mode  
(6) [Gain]  
If [Manual] is selected for [Exposure], set a desired  
Select from [Auto], [Manual], [Auto (Flickerless)] or  
[Auto (Shutter-priority AE)].  
gain value.  
If [Auto] is selected for [Day/Night] under [Camera] in  
the Setting page (p. 43), select [Auto], [Auto  
(Flickerless)] or [Auto (Shutter-priority AE)].  
[Auto]  
Moving the slider to the left decreases the gain  
(sensitivity to brightness) and darkens the video.  
Moving the slider to the right increases the gain and  
brightens the video.  
The exposure is controlled automatically.  
[Manual]  
The exposure is set by adjusting the shutter speed  
and gain values manually.  
Important  
• If the subject is a traffic signal or electronic scoreboard, etc.,  
the captured video may flicker.  
In this case, try changing [Exposure] to [Auto (Shutter-priority  
AE)] and then select a shutter speed lower than 1/100, to see  
if the situation improves.  
[Auto (Flickerless)]  
In this mode, video flickering caused by fluorescent  
lights, etc., can be reduced. The shutter speed is  
automatically adjusted according to the brightness  
of the environment in which the camera is used.  
[Auto (Shutter-priority AE)]  
• [Exposure Compensation] and [Manual] for [Exposure]  
cannot be selected if [Smart Shade Control] is set to [Auto].  
• The [BLC] button is not available if [Exposure] is set to  
[Manual].  
In this mode, the desired shutter speed can be  
specified.  
• Even if [Exposure] is set to [Auto (Flickerless)], some screen  
flicker may still occur under unstable light source conditions.  
(2) [Exposure Compensation]  
When [Auto], [Auto (Flickerless)] or [Auto (Shutter-  
priority AE)] is selected for [Exposure], the exposure  
compensation value desired can be selected from  
nine levels (-4 to +4) using the slider.  
To darken the video, select a negative value. To  
brighten the video, select a positive value.  
• When [Camera] > [Camera Control] > [AGC Limit] is set to  
[OFF] and [Exposure] is set to [Auto (Shutter-priority AE)],  
exposure compensation and backlight compensation will not  
be performed.  
(3) [Metering Mode]  
Setting White Balance  
When [Auto], [Auto (Flickerless)] or [Auto (Shutter-  
priority AE)] is selected for [Exposure], the metering  
mode can be selected from [Center-Weighted],  
[Average] or [Spot].  
(1)  
For an explanation on each item set in [Metering  
Mode], see [Metering Mode] in the Setting page  
(2)  
(4) [Shutter Speed]  
(3)  
When [Manual] or [Auto (Shutter-priority AE)] is  
selected for [Exposure], select the shutter speed  
desired. If [Manual] is selected, set the shutter speed  
in the range of [1/1 sec] to [1/16000 sec] from a pull-  
down menu. If [Auto (Shutter-priority AE)] is selected,  
set the shutter speed in the range of [1/2 sec] to [1/  
16000 sec] from a pull-down menu.  
When capturing a moving subject, selecting a higher  
shutter speed can reduce blurry video capture.  
(1) [Auto]  
The white balance is adjusted automatically.  
(5) [Slow Shutter]  
(2) [Light Source]  
You can set slow shutter if [Exposure] is set to [Auto]  
or [Auto (Flickerless)]. Select a value in the range of  
[1/2 sec] to [1/30 sec] from the pull-down menu.  
As slower shutter speeds generate afterimages when  
capturing a moving subject, select an appropriate  
time according to the capture conditions.  
Select the light source from the pull-down menu below  
according to the condition in which the camera is  
used.  
For an explanation on each item set in [Light Source],  
see [White Balance] in the Setting page (p. 43).  
(3) [Manual]  
The white balance is adjusted manually.  
[One-shot WB]  
This is used for forcibly locking the white balance to  
match the light source.  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Performing Operations and Settings in the Admin Viewer  
Example of setting method:  
(2) [Day Mode]  
Illuminate a white subject (white paper, etc.) using  
the light source, making sure the subject fills the  
entire screen, and then execute [One-shot WB].  
[R Gain], [B Gain]  
Color video can be viewed in the normal mode.  
(3) [Night Mode]  
Video is shown in black and white.  
When setting the white balance manually, set the  
values of red and blue gain in the range 0 to 1023 to  
match the light source.  
Important  
If the viewer is exited in [Day Mode] or [Night Mode], auto day/  
night stays disabled even if [Auto] is set in the setting page. To  
set auto day/night to enable, be sure to exit the viewer after  
setting [Auto].  
Note  
6
Though the camera has an infrared filter, there is no effect on  
lighting due to infrared light as the camera does not have an  
insertion/removal mechanism for the filter.  
Selecting the External Device Output  
Important  
• Since the light source selection options are based on  
representative characteristics, proper colors may not be  
achieved depending on the applicable light source. In this  
case, use the [One-shot WB] function.  
You can control external device output and display the  
current output status using an icon. Output can be  
activated and deactivated by clicking this icon.  
• If the subject looks greenish under mercury lamps in the  
[Auto] mode, select the [Mercury Lamp] mode under light  
source. If the video is still not shown in appropriate colors  
under mercury lamps when the [Mercury Lamp] mode is  
selected under light source, use [One-shot WB].  
• When the subject has only one color, illumination is low, or  
when sodium lamps, mercury lamps and certain other  
fluorescent lighting are used, colors may not be adjusted  
appropriately.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Output inactive state  
• When [Day/Night] is set to [Night Mode] (including when it is  
set to [Auto] and night mode is judged to be applicable), the  
white balance function cannot be used.  
Output active state  
• Notes on capturing video continuously day and night  
If a subject that seldom changes is captured in a location  
where the light source changes gradually, such as when  
capturing a subject continuously day and night, appropriate  
colors may not be achieved.  
Registering Custom Settings  
By registering settings for camera position, exposure,  
white balance, etc. beforehand, you can load settings  
using manual or automatic control.  
In the above case, applying changes to the video to capture  
will achieve the appropriate colors.  
Note  
• In custom settings, the setting values for the following items in  
the Control for Admin menu can be saved.  
[Smart Shade Control], [Exposure], [White Balance], [Image  
Quality Adjustment], [Day/Night]  
Setting the Day/Night Mode  
[Pan/Tilt/Zoom]  
[Focus]  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(1) [Auto]  
The camera automatically switches to day mode or  
night mode depending on ambient brightness.  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
• Click [Register] after completing the above settings to register  
the custom settings.  
Setting automatic control  
Click the [Auto Control Settings] button to display the  
[Auto Control Settings] panel, and set the [Day/Night  
Mode Switching] and [Timer].  
(1)  
(2)  
(1)  
(2)  
(1) Custom setting button  
Select the numbered button with the registered  
custom settings to load the settings.  
(2) [Register Custom Settings]  
(3)  
The [Register Custom Settings] panel is displayed.  
(3)  
(4)  
(5)  
(6)  
(4)  
(7)  
(1) [Auto Control]  
Select [Not used], [Day/Night Mode Switching], or  
[Timer] for the auto control setting.  
(3) [Register to]  
Select the number for the custom setting you want to  
register from the selection box.  
(2) [In Day Mode], [In Night Mode]  
When [Day/Night Mode Switching] is selected in [Auto  
Control], select the custom setting number used when  
switching day mode and night mode or select [None]  
for each item.  
(4) [Include Current PTZ Position] checkbox  
Select the checkbox to register the current pan, tilt,  
and zoom settings.  
(3) [Timer 1] to [Timer 4]  
(5) [Register]  
When [Timer] is selected in [Auto Control], set the  
time for switching the custom setting in [Time] in 24-  
hour format and select the custom setting number in  
[Custom Setting], or select [None].  
Register the current camera settings in the custom  
setting number selected in [Register to].  
(6) [Auto Control Settings]  
Displays the [Auto Control Settings] panel.  
(4) [Register]  
(7) [Verify registered contents of custom settings]  
Displays the settings registered for the custom setting  
number selected in [Register to].  
Register the auto control settings.  
Important  
If the same time is specified multiple times for [Timer 1] to  
[Timer 4], [Register] will be disabled and the settings will not be  
possible.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Performing Operations and Settings in the Admin Viewer  
Adjusting Image Quality  
Displaying Event Status  
Clicking the [Event Display] button will show the event  
display panel, which shows the input status of external  
devices, as well as the status of video and volume  
detection by the intelligent function.  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(1)  
(2)  
6
(1) [Noise Reduction]  
Select [Mild], [Standard], or [Strong] for the noise  
reduction setting.  
Principally, this setting is more effective in low-light  
conditions. When set to [Strong], the noise reduction  
effect is increased, but the afterimage of moving  
subjects becomes easier to see. When set to [Mild],  
the noise reduction effect is decreased and resolution  
is increased, but the video file size becomes larger.  
(3)  
(1) [External Device Input]  
When a contact input signal is received from an  
external device, input will be activated and an icon will  
be displayed.  
(2) [Sharpness]  
Select a level from [1] (Mild) to [7] (Strong) for the  
sharpness setting.  
When set to [Strong] the video becomes sharper, and  
when set to [Mild] the video becomes softer. Also,  
when set to [Strong] the video file size becomes  
larger.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Input inactive state  
Input active state  
(3) [Color Saturation]  
Select a level from [1] (Light) to [7] (Dark) for the color  
saturation setting.  
(2) [Intelligent Function (Image Detection)]  
The status of intelligent function (image detection) will  
be displayed. When the detection settings  
configured in intelligent functions (Moving Object  
Detection, Abandoned Object Detection, Removed  
Object Detection, Camera Tampering Detection or  
Passing Detection) enter Detected mode, the  
corresponding icon will turn green (p. 103).  
If names are entered in [Detection Setting Name] in  
Intelligent Function Setting Tools (p. 103), [Setting 1]  
to [Setting 15] will be displayed with the  
Enabling Video Reception  
(1)  
(2)  
(1) [Max. Frame Rate (JPEG)]  
corresponding name.  
You can select the maximum frame rate for JPEG  
displayed video from one of twelve levels between [30  
fps] to [0.2 fps]. The setting is not available when  
displaying H.264 video in the video display area.  
Example:  
(2) [Enable H.264 reception] checkbox  
Setting 1: Image Detection status ON  
Other settings: Image Detection status OFF  
Select to receive H.264 video. The Software Product  
License Agreement dialog box appears. Click [Yes] to  
accept the terms of the license agreement. The  
decoder is downloaded from the camera, enabling  
H.264 video reception.  
Note  
The icon signifying Detection mode will be displayed for a  
maximum of five minutes (except for Moving Object Detection).  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
(3) [Intelligent Function (Volume detection)]  
The volume detection status is displayed. When  
sound that meets the criteria selected under [Event] >  
[Volume Detection] in the Setting Page is detected,  
the icon turns green (p. 56).  
To stop video recording, click the [Start/Stop Memory  
Card Recording] button again.  
3
Important  
Recording to the memory card will be terminated when the  
length of manually recorded videos exceeds 300 seconds from  
the time recording started.  
Example:  
Volume Detection status ON  
Confirming Manually Recorded Video  
Use the Recorded Video Utility (p. 112) to confirm video  
manually recorded to a memory card.  
Click the [Recorded Video Utility] button to start the  
Recorded Video Utility from the Admin Viewer.  
Recording to a Memory Card Manually  
Video displayed in the Admin Viewer can be manually  
recorded to a memory card.  
Note  
• To record on a memory card, a memory card must be inserted  
in the camera (p. 125) and [Save Logs and Videos] must be  
selected in the setting page > [Memory Card] > [Operation  
Settings].  
• The format and size of the video recorded on a memory card  
depends on the settings made on the Setting page.  
Video format: [Memory Card] > [Video Format]  
Video size:  
JPEG [Video] > [JPEG] > [Video Size: Upload /  
Memory card]  
H.264 [Video] > [H.264(1)] > [Video Size]  
Recording Videos Manually  
If you have not yet obtained the camera control  
privileges, click the [Obtain/Release Camera Control]  
button and obtain the control privileges.  
1
Click the [Start/Stop Memory Card Recording] button.  
2
The [Start/Stop Memory Card Recording] button  
appearance changes as shown below depending on  
recording status.  
Not recording  
Recording  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Chapter  
7
Appendix  
Memory Card Access  
Modifiers  
Troubleshooting  
List of Log Messages  
List of Viewer Messages  
Restore Default Settings  
List of Factory Default Settings  
Specifications  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Memory Card Access  
You can set the camera so that the following data is saved automatically to the camera’s memory card. (“Chapter 4 Setting  
When either the storage capacity of the memory card or the number of files that can be saved is reached, you cannot save  
further video to the memory card. If this happens, delete any unneeded video files with the Recorded Video Utility.  
• Video files when recording-mode stream transmission failed to be sent due to network errors (JPEG only)  
• Video files when HTTP or FTP upload failed (JPEG/H.264(1))  
• Video files manually recorded by the user from the Admin Viewer (JPEG/H.264)  
• Video files recorded by [External Device Input], [Volume Detection], and the intelligent functions when an event occurs  
(JPEG/H.264(1))  
• Video files recorded using a timer (JPEG/H.264(1))  
• Log  
Access to the Memory Card  
Use the Recorded Video Utility (p. 112) of the Admin Tools or FTP software (not included) to access the camera using the  
camera’s IP address.  
FTP Software Settings  
Address:  
User ID:  
Camera IP address  
Administrator user ID  
(factory default setting: 192.168.100.1)  
(factory default setting: root)  
Password:  
Administrator password (factory default setting: camera)  
Important  
• When deleting a video using a method other than the Recorded Video Utility, you must perform [Recreate Video Management  
Information] under [Memory Card] in the setting page (p. 70).  
• Canon will assume no liability for any accident or damage resulting from use of FTP software.  
Directory Structure for Data Downloaded with Recorded Video Utility  
When video on a memory card is downloaded to a computer with the Recorded Video Utility, folders are created  
automatically in accordance with conditions such as the camera and the date and time.  
The following shows the folder structure.  
Example: H.264 video, manually recorded using a camera with an IP address of 192.168.100.1, on Sept. 10, 2013, from  
16:00:00 to 16:59:59 (Camera Time Zone: GMT+09:00).  
D:\work \192.168.100.1\ 20130910 \ 070000_075959 _ +9 _ M _ H264  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(5) (6)  
(7)  
(1) Folder specified with [Download to]  
(2) IP address of the camera  
(3) Video recording date  
(4) Recording start and end times (UTC)  
(5) Time difference from UTC  
(6) Recording type  
E: Event  
M: Manual recording  
R: Recording-mode stream  
T: Timer  
U: Upload  
(7) Video format (JPEG or H.264)  
Note  
• A folder is created once per hour.  
• If the time difference is added to the starting and ending times, it will equal the local time.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Memory Card Access  
File Name Format for Data Downloaded with Recorded Video Utility  
Example: Video, manually recorded on Sept. 10, 2013, starting from 16:06:19 (Camera Time Zone: GMT+09:00).  
20130910 070618-070619-M 00 _ 507.mov  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
(1) Video recording date  
(2) File creation time (UTC)  
(3) Recording start time (UTC)  
(4) Recording type  
E: Event  
M: Manual recording  
R: Recording-mode stream  
T: Timer  
U: Upload  
7
Note  
• The file creation time will be earlier than the actual start of recording time.  
• If multiple video files were created because recording continued for several seconds or more, a new file name with different values for  
(2) and the sequential number ending will be used. In the above example, if recording starts at 16:09:19, and the next file is switched to  
4 seconds later, the file name will be as follows.  
20130910070623-070619-M00_508.mov  
Since this is a continuation of the recording that started at 16:09:19, the recording start time (3) will remain as “070619”. The sequential  
number at the end of the file name will be increased by one increment.  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modifiers  
According to the setting item, you can specify parameters using modifier “% characters”.  
Modifiers  
Meaning  
Description of character string entered  
%n  
Reason for capture (number) 0 (test) | 1 (External device input) | 33 (Timer 1) | 34 (Timer 2) | 35 (Timer 3) | 36 (Timer 4) |  
145 (Volume detection) | 161 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 1) |  
162 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 2) | 163 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 3) |  
164 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 4) | 165 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 5) |  
166 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 6) | 167 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 7) |  
168 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 8) | 169 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 9) |  
170 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 10) | 171 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 11) |  
172 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 12) | 173 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 13) |  
174 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 14) | 175 (Intelligent Function Detection Setting 15)  
%N  
Reason for capture  
(character string)  
<External input device name (alphanumeric characters)> | NULL (blank entry or timer event test)  
%X  
%Y  
%C  
%D  
%P  
%T  
%Z  
%V  
%y  
%m  
%d  
%w  
%H  
%M  
%S  
%s  
%z  
%a  
Width of video  
Number of pixels in horizontal direction  
Number of pixels in vertical direction  
1
Height of video  
Camera number  
Camera name  
Setting for [Camera Name (alphanumeric characters)]  
Pan position  
-174.99 – 175.00  
-90.00 – 0.00  
0
Tilt position  
0
Zoom position  
0.01 – 300.00  
0
Camera server  
VB-S30D/VB-S31D/VB-S800D/VB-S900F  
Year of capture time  
Month of capture time  
Day of capture time  
Day of week of capture time  
Hours of capture time  
Minutes of capture time  
Seconds of capture time  
Milliseconds of capture time  
Time zone of capture time  
2001 – 2031  
01 – 12  
01 – 31  
0 – 6 (Sunday to Saturday)  
00 – 23  
00 – 59  
00 – 59  
000 – 999  
-1200 – +1300  
Weekday name of capture  
time  
Sun | Mon | Tue | Wed | Thu | Fri | Sat  
%b  
%h  
Month name of capture time  
Host Name  
Jan | Feb | Mar | Apr | May | Jun | Jul | Aug | Sep | Oct | Nov | Dec  
Note  
• A runtime error will occur if the specified name does not match.  
• If this modifier is not defined, “%” will be deleted.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Modifiers  
Available Modifiers  
The modifiers that can be used for each setting item are specified below.  
[Parameter (query string)]  
All modifiers can be used.  
[Subdirectory Name to Create]  
Only the modifiers %y,%m,%d,%w,%H,%h,%n can be used.  
[File Name to Create]  
Only the modifiers %y,%m,%d,%w,%H,%M,%S,%s,%n can be used.  
[Message Body]  
All modifiers can be used.  
7
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Before contacting the dealer where you purchased the product or Canon's Customer Service Center, check the items  
specified as follows. If a log message is displayed, check the details of the message and corresponding countermeasure in  
the log message list.  
Problem  
Countermeasures  
The camera does not start.  
• Check if the LAN cable is connected correctly.  
• Turn the camera off and on again (see “Installation Guide” > “Connecting the  
Camera”).  
VB Initial Setting Tool does not operate.  
• Check if the LAN cable is connected correctly.  
• Turn the camera off and on again (see “Installation Guide” > “Connecting the  
Camera”). The camera no longer responds to VB Initial Setting Tool 20 minutes after  
being turned on.  
• Check if the camera and the computer in which the VB Initial Setting Tool is operating  
are connected to the LAN in the same segment.  
• The VB Initial Setting Tool may not function when the [Windows Firewall] function is  
• Check if you are using an older version of the VB Initial Setting Tool.  
The top page of the camera is not displayed. • Check if the LAN cable is connected correctly.  
• Check if the network to which the camera is connected is set up correctly. In  
particular, check if the IP address, subnet mask and default gateway address are set  
within the ranges supported by the applicable network.  
• If you have changed the IP address, the new address will not become effective until  
the camera is rebooted.  
• Check if the correct URI (camera IP address) is entered in your web browser (p. 32,  
• Check whether the connection is from a computer whose access is blocked in  
[Access Control] on the Setting page.  
• Check the authentication method, [User Name], [Password], combination of  
certificates, and network rules for connection in [802.1X] on the Setting page with the  
system administrator.  
The Admin Tools will not start.  
The Admin Viewer will not start.  
• “Your web browser is not supported.” If this message is displayed, use Internet  
Explorer 8 or later.  
• “Application could not be started. Install .NET Framework 3.5 (SP1 or later).” If this  
message is displayed, install .NET Framework 3.5 (SP1 or later) or enable settings  
• “Application could not be started. Install .NET Framework 4.5.” If this message is  
displayed, install .NET Framework 4.5 or enable settings (p. 18).  
• “JavaScript is not available or disabled on your web browser.” If this message is  
displayed, set [Active Script] to [Enable] in Internet Explorer's security settings. (See  
(2) below for instructions on how to set this.)  
• “The settings from (1) to (3) below must be carried out to use the Admin Viewer and  
Admin Tools.” If this message is displayed, set the following.  
(1) Install the Admin Tools Certificate with the installer (p. 26).  
(2) When using Internet Explorer 9 or greater, follow the steps in “Registering the  
[Trusted sites] in Internet Explorer's security settings.  
(3) In Internet Explorer click [Tools] > [Internet Options] > [Security] > [Custom  
level] and under the Security Settings list, set [XAML browser applications],  
[File download] and [Launching programs and files in an IFRAME] to [Enable].  
Video is not displayed.  
There is no audio.  
• To improve video quality, refer to “[Video] Setting Video Size, Quality and Frame Rate”  
in “Chapter 4 Setting Page” (p. 46) to change settings and make adjustments.  
• Up to 30 viewers can access the camera at the same time. If this limit has been  
exceeded, video is not displayed and a message appears.  
• If there is no audio, check the audio server settings of the camera and also check the  
sound and audio device settings for the computer.  
• If you are using the Admin Viewer with the administrator authorities, check if the  
camera is connected to the RM Viewer or another viewer that lets the administrator  
use audio.  
• In VB Viewer, audio cannot be used if the Canon Network Camera Audio Receiver  
add-on is not installed.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Countermeasures  
The camera cannot be controlled.  
• If you connect the Admin Viewer as an administrator, you will have exclusive  
possession of the camera control privileges. If you connect to the Admin Viewer as an  
Authorized User, you cannot control the camera unless the administrator releases  
camera control. Consult the Administrator (p. 120).  
• The pan, tilt, focus and zoom may operate abnormally if the pan and tilt operational  
durability estimates are exceeded (p. 127).  
The viewer gets disconnected.  
You forgot your password.  
• Check the network and computer for abnormality.  
• Reboot the computer and connect again.  
• You can initialize all settings of the camera excluding date and time using the reset  
switch (p. 159). The administrator password required for initialization is “camera”.  
Note, however, that network settings such as the IP address and subnet mask will be  
initialized and must be set again.  
Data cannot be uploaded.  
• Check the upload destination in the [Upload] menu, as well as the upload operation  
upon event in the [Event] menu, to see if both are set correctly.  
• You can perform an operation check based on the currently set upload destination by  
running a test (p. 52) from the [Upload] menu.  
7
• Check [Maintenance] > [View Logs] or logs on the server to check the detailed  
operating environment. For [View Logs], see “Application (Uploader) Messages”  
(p. 149). Also see “Important” in p. 51.  
• For the server settings, contact your System Administrator.  
You cannot use recording-mode stream  
transmission.  
• You cannot use recording-mode stream transmission if [Upload] > [Upload] is set to  
HTTP or FTP. Set [Upload] to [Upload Disabled] (p. 51).  
Video cannot be recorded on a memory card. • To record video to a memory card when an event occurs, check the [Video Record  
Action] settings under [Event] in the setting page. When [Video Record Action] is set  
to [Upload], change it to [Record to Memory Card].  
• When recording-mode stream video that could not be transmitted due to network  
errors or video for which the HTTP/FTP upload failed is not stored on the memory card,  
check [Operation Settings] under [Memory Card] in the setting page. When  
[Operation Settings] is set to [Save Log], change it to [Save Logs and Videos].  
• To manually save recordings to a memory card, obtain camera control privileges.  
Files cannot be saved in the Settings page or • Windows prohibits saving to certain folders. Accordingly, an attempt to save a file may  
Admin Tools.  
fail. Specify [Documents], [Pictures] and other folders.  
A message indicating “Cannot access the  
memory card. Please recreate the video  
management information on the Setting  
page.” appears when an attempt is made to  
start up the Recorded Video Utility.  
• Select [Memory Card Information] under [Memory Card] in the setting page to check  
[Video Management Information Status]. When [Video Management Information  
Recreation Required] is displayed, click [Exec] in [Recreate Video Management  
Information] under [Memory Card Operations]. When video management information  
has been recreated, make sure that [Video Management Information Status] is  
[Normal].  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of Log Messages  
W031 Transmitted video data size [info]  
Log Messages on the Camera  
Description  
%1= host=<Host>, user=<User>,  
video=<jpg | h264>:<Number of frames>  
(W031)  
Log messages are classified into the following types.  
Category  
crit  
Level  
Error  
Code  
4xx  
Fault level  
%1  
W: WebView session, V: Session-less video  
client  
Software-level failure  
(Task operations will  
stop)  
Meaning  
When a client disconnected, the total data  
that was sent to the client displayed in  
number of frames.  
err  
Error  
3xx  
Operational error  
(Operations will  
continue)  
W040 Clearing to external memory [info]  
warning  
notice  
Warning  
Warning  
2xx  
1xx  
Non-operational error  
Description  
%1  
%1 the image storing - %2 (W040)  
Starting or stopping  
Error external to the  
system  
%2  
Reason for starting/stopping  
info  
Information 0xx  
Information on normal  
operation  
Meaning  
Started or stopped clearing stream  
recording to external memory.  
Note  
If no content is recorded in a log for approximately two hours, “--  
MARK --” will be recorded in the message area.  
W101 Invalid user name [notice]  
Description  
Meaning  
user <User name> not found (W101)  
The camera was accessed by an  
unauthorized user.  
Application (Camera) Messages  
W001 Starting and stopping of system [info]  
W102 Invalid password [notice]  
Description  
%1  
%1 webview (W001)  
Starting or stopping  
Description  
user <User name> password mismatch  
(W102)  
Meaning  
wvhttp server (webview) has started or  
stopped.  
Meaning  
The password is invalid  
W130 Buffer recovered [notice]  
W030 Startup and shutdown of WebView Livescope  
Client [info]  
Description  
Meaning  
stream buffer recovered (W130)  
Video buffer for stream recording has  
recovered.  
Description  
%1%2 host=<Host>, user=<User>, prio=<  
Priority>(W030)  
%1  
W: WebView session, V: Session-less video  
client, N: Session-less event client  
W201 Invalid panorama image [warning]  
%2  
+: Connect, -: Disconnect  
Description  
Meaning  
corrupt panorama image - ignored (W201)  
Meaning  
The camera server client was connected or  
disconnected.  
Panorama image information acquisition  
failed.  
W230 Buffer overflow [warning]  
Description  
Meaning  
stream buffer overflowed (W230)  
The video buffer for the stream recording  
overflowed and video was discarded.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
List of Log Messages  
A134 Invalid upload setting (FTP/HTTP mode) [notice]  
Application (Uploader) Messages  
Description  
ftp/http mode invalid. uploader set <none>  
forcibly (A134)  
A004 Starting and stopping of uploader [info]  
Meaning  
The upload mode setting is invalid. The  
upload function was forcibly disabled.  
Description  
%1  
%1 uploader (A004)  
Starting or stopping  
Meaning  
The uploader was started or stopped.  
A135 Invalid upload setting (FTP PORT/PASV mode)  
[notice]  
A040 Number of uploads (MAIL) [notice]  
Description  
ftp port/pasv mode invalid. uploader set  
<pasv> forcibly (A135)  
Description  
%1  
uploader mail: normal=%1 test=%2 (A040)  
Meaning  
The PORT/PASV mode setting in connection  
with FTP upload is invalid. The PASV mode  
was forcibly set.  
Number of normal uploads.  
%2  
Number of test uploads.  
Meaning  
Shows the number of uploads executed.  
7
A136 Invalid upload setting (HTTP notification only/  
image mode) [notice]  
A041 Number of uploads (FTP) [notice]  
Description  
http notice/image mode invalid. uploader  
set <image> forcibly (A136)  
Description  
%1  
uploader ftp: normal=%1 test=%2 (A041)  
Number of normal uploads.  
Meaning  
The notification only/image mode setting in  
connection with HTTP upload is invalid. The  
image mode was forcibly set.  
%2  
Number of test uploads.  
Meaning  
Shows the number of uploads executed.  
A137 Invalid upload setting (E-mail notification)  
[notice]  
A042 Number of uploads (HTTP) [notice]  
Description  
%1  
uploader http: normal=%1 test=%2 (A042)  
Description  
mode invalid. uploader set <none> forcibly  
(A137)  
Number of normal uploads.  
Meaning  
The e-mail notification setting is invalid. E-  
mail notification was forcibly disabled.  
%2  
Number of test uploads.  
Meaning  
Shows the number of uploads executed.  
A138 Invalid upload setting (E-mail notification  
authentication mode) [notice]  
A120 Resolution of upload destination name failed  
[notice]  
Description  
authentication mode invalid. uploader set  
<smtp auth> forcibly (A138)  
Description  
uploader cannot resolve the server name  
(A120)  
Meaning  
The setting for e-mail notification  
authentication mode is invalid.  
“SMTP_AUTH” was forcibly set.  
Meaning  
The name of the upload destination could  
not be resolved.  
A274 Event buffer for upload overflowed [warning]  
A121 Connection to upload destination failed [notice]  
Description  
Meaning  
event queue is full (A274)  
Description  
Meaning  
uploader cannot connect the server (A121)  
Event buffer for upload overflowed.  
Execution of connect to upload destination  
failed.  
Countermeasure Make adjustments to reduce the number of  
event occurrences.  
A122 Connection to upload destination failed [notice]  
A275 Video buffer for upload overflowed [warning]  
Description  
Meaning  
uploader cannot connect the server (A122)  
Description  
Meaning  
buffer queue is full (A275)  
The upload destination could not be  
connected due to a reason other than A120  
and A121.  
Video buffer for upload overflowed.  
Countermeasure Make adjustments to reduce the number of  
event occurrences. Also adjust the video  
quality, video size and frame rate for upload.  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A470 Uploader initialization failed [crit]  
B103 Client forcibly disconnected [notice]  
Description  
%1  
uploader initialization failure - %1 (A470)  
Description  
%1  
%1 access denied [%2] (B103)  
Client host IP address  
Error number  
Meaning  
The uploader could not be initialized.  
%2  
Denial type (41 | 42 | 4a)  
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting the  
camera, the camera is faulty, arrange for  
servicing.  
Meaning  
Connection was initially permitted, but the setting  
has subsequently been changed to prohibit  
access, thereby triggering a forced disconnection  
(the denial type is the same with B102).  
Application (Audio Server) Messages  
B402 Audio server initialization failed [err]  
Description  
%1  
wvaudio initialization error [%1] (B402)  
Error number  
B001 Starting and shutdown of audio server [info]  
Description  
%1  
%1 audio. (B001)  
Meaning  
The audio server could not be initialized.  
The audio server stops.  
starting | stopping  
Meaning  
The audio server was started/shut down.  
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting, the  
camera is faulty. Arrange for servicing.  
B011 Audio client connected [info]  
B403 Settings change failed [err]  
Description  
%1  
[%1] %2 connected n=%3 (B011)  
Description  
%1  
cannot set config [%1:%2] (B403)  
Error notification number  
Error number  
Client type (send | recv)  
Client host IP address  
%2  
%2  
%3  
Total number of clients  
An audio client was connected.  
Meaning  
The settings could not be updated. The  
audio server stops.  
Meaning  
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting, the  
camera is faulty. Arrange for servicing.  
B012 Audio client closed [info]  
Description  
%1  
[%1] %2 closed n= %3 (B012)  
Client type (send | recv)  
Client host IP address  
Application (Video-Related) Messages  
%2  
V001 Starting and shutdown of video server [info]  
%3  
Total number of clients  
Description  
%1  
%1 video (V001)  
Meaning  
An audio client was disconnected.  
Starting or stopping  
B102 Client connection denied [notice]  
Meaning  
The video server was started/stopped.  
Description  
%1  
%1 request denied [%2] (B102)  
Client host IP address  
V020 Starting intelligent service [info]  
Description  
Meaning  
starting intelligent. (V020)  
%2  
Denial type (41 | 43 | ...)  
Intelligent service was started.  
Meaning  
Client connection was denied due to an  
authentication error (41), time specification  
error (42), insufficient resource (43),  
specification of unsupported codec (45),  
specification of unpermitted user level (47),  
too many clients (49) or invalid operation  
mode (4a).  
V021 Shutting down intelligence service [info]  
Description  
Meaning  
shutdown intelligent. (V021)  
Intelligent service was shut down.  
Countermeasure 41: Check user name, password or user list  
used when connecting. 42: Check playtime  
or maximum connection time settings used  
when connecting. 43: Reconnect or restart.  
45: Use supported client software. 47:  
Check user level used when connecting. 49:  
Check client number settings. 4a: Check if  
usage of audio server is enabled.  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of Log Messages  
V200 Video input warning [warning]  
V400 Video input initialization error [crit]  
Description  
%1  
video %1 warning - %2 (V200)  
Video number  
Description  
video %1 initialization failure - %2 (%3)  
(V400)  
%1  
Video number  
Process description  
Error details  
%2  
Error number  
%2  
Meaning  
An error that permits recovery of the video  
input system was detected.  
%3  
Countermeasure Change video size or Q value, or decrease  
data size for each JPEG image.  
Meaning  
The video input function was stopped  
because the video input system could not  
be initialized.  
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting, the  
camera is faulty. Arrange for servicing.  
V300 Video input error [err]  
Description  
%1  
video %1 warning - %2 (V300)  
Video number  
V401 Video input command error [crit]  
7
%2  
Error number  
Description  
%1  
video %1 command error - %2 (%3) (V401)  
Video number  
Meaning  
An error in the video input was detected that  
may adversely affect the operation of the  
camera.  
%2  
Process description  
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting, the  
camera is faulty. Arrange for servicing.  
%3  
Error details  
Meaning  
The video input function was stopped  
because a video input command could not  
be processed.  
V320 Internal error in intelligent service [err]  
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting, the  
camera is faulty. Arrange for servicing.  
Description  
cannot work intelligent [%1] [%2] [%3] .  
(V320)  
%1  
Error number  
V402 Video input frozen [crit]  
%2  
Cause of error  
Error information  
Description  
%1  
video %1 stalled (V402)  
Video number  
%3  
Meaning  
An internal error occurred in intelligent  
service.  
Meaning  
The video input function was stopped  
because video generation stopped.  
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting, the  
camera is faulty. Arrange for servicing.  
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting, the  
camera is faulty. Arrange for servicing.  
V321 Pseudo mode setting error in intelligent service  
[err]  
V403 Video input error [crit]  
Description  
%1  
video %1 fatal error - %2 (V403)  
Video number  
Description  
Meaning  
pseudo mode setting fail. (V321)  
An error occurred in the pseudo mode  
setting of intelligent service.  
%2  
Error number  
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting, the  
camera is faulty. Arrange for servicing.  
Meaning  
The video input function was stopped  
because an error that does not permit  
recovery of the video input system was  
detected.  
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting, the  
camera is faulty. Arrange for servicing.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
V420 Could not start intelligent service [crit]  
Application (Camera) Messages  
Description  
intelligent initialization error [%1] [%2] .  
(V420)  
C001 Starting and stopping of camera control module  
[info]  
%1  
Error number  
Description  
%1  
%1 camerad (C001)  
starting | stopping  
%2  
Cause of error  
Meaning  
Failed to initialize intelligent service.  
Meaning  
The camera control module started/  
stopped.  
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting, the  
camera is faulty. Arrange for servicing.  
C002 Camera application started [info]  
V421 Intelligent service error [crit]  
Description  
Meaning  
starting cameraappl (C002)  
Description  
%1  
intelligent working error [%1] [%2] . (V421)  
Error number  
The camera application started.  
%2  
Cause of error  
C201 Day/Night mode switching warning [warning]  
Meaning  
An error that does not permit recovery  
occurred while intelligent service was  
running.  
Description  
Can’t switch Day/Night mode, because  
current mode is Auto. (C201)  
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting, the  
camera is faulty. Arrange for servicing.  
Meaning  
Could not switch day/night mode.  
Countermeasure Set Day/Night mode manually.  
Application (Memory Card) Messages  
C211 Camera control command overflow [warning]  
Description  
Meaning  
command queue overflowed (C211)  
M001 Starting and stopping of memory card control  
module [info]  
The camera control command queue  
overflowed, and some commands were  
discarded.  
Description  
%1  
%1 sdctrl (M001)  
Starting or stopping  
Countermeasure Allow a longer interval (200 ms) for sending  
the camera control command.  
Meaning  
The memory card control module (sdctrl)  
has started or stopped.  
HTTP Server Messages  
M203 Not enough space on memory card [warning]  
Description  
Meaning  
There is not available space (M203)  
Insufficient memory card capacity.  
H143 User name specification error [notice]  
Description  
(http_auth.c.XXX) get_password failed,  
IP:%1 (H143)  
%1  
IP address  
M204 Invalid file removed [warning]  
Meaning  
An unknown user was specified in user  
authentication.  
Description  
%1  
Invalid file %1 was removed. (M204)  
Name of removed file  
Meaning  
An invalid file was removed.  
H144 Password specification error [notice]  
Description  
(http_auth.c.XXX) password doesn't match  
for %1 username%2, IP:%3 (H144)  
M301 Memory card control module error [err]  
Description  
%1  
%1 process failure (M301)  
mount or unmount  
%1  
URL XSS vulnerability countermeasure  
implementation (process equivalent to ftpd)  
%2  
User Name  
IP address  
Meaning  
Mount or unmount process failed.  
%3  
Meaning  
A wrong password was specified in user  
authentication.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of Log Messages  
H201 Timeout disconnect [warning]  
S070 Change to SSL certificate [info]  
Description  
a request for %1 timed out after writing %d  
seconds (H201)  
Description  
%1  
ssl: succeeded to %1 certificate (S070)  
generate | load | delete | restore  
%1  
Request URI  
Meaning  
A certificate was generated/loaded/deleted/  
restored  
%d  
360 (Timeout time)  
Meaning  
Disconnected due to HTTP server timeout  
(360 sec.).  
Countermeasure None  
S302 Error on saving settings [err]  
System Messages  
Description  
Meaning  
Can’t update system settings (S302)  
An error generated while the system was  
saving a setting. Setting could not be saved.  
S001 System started [info]  
Countermeasure Provide enough memory space by deleting  
Description  
Meaning  
starting paramd (S001)  
Parameter management module started.  
unnecessary files in the user memory area,  
etc.  
7
S002 System settings changed [info]  
S303 Error on saving settings [err]  
Description  
Meaning  
Updated system settings. (S002)  
Description  
Meaning  
Can’t update files of system settings (S303)  
Settings not requiring rebooting were  
changed.  
An error generated while the system was  
saving a setting. Setting could not be saved.  
Countermeasure Provide enough memory space by deleting  
unnecessary files in the user memory area,  
etc.  
S010 Event service started [info]  
Description  
Meaning  
starting event (S010)  
The event service was started.  
S307 Error on saving settings [err]  
Description  
(vbadmin.c XXX) Can't update system  
settings (S307)  
S011 Event service shut down [info]  
Meaning  
An error generated while the settings were  
saved by the setup protocol. Setting could  
not be saved.  
Description  
Meaning  
shutdown event (S011)  
The event service was shut down.  
Countermeasure Provide enough memory space by deleting  
unnecessary files in the user memory area, etc.  
S012 External device service started [info]  
Description  
Meaning  
starting extio (S012)  
S310 Working error in event service [err]  
The external device input/output service  
was started.  
Description  
%1  
cannot work event [%1] [%2] [%3] (S310)  
Error number  
S013 External device service shut down [info]  
%2  
Cause of error  
Description  
Meaning  
shutdown extio (S013)  
%3  
Error information  
The external device input/output service  
was shut down.  
Meaning  
An error occurred while the event service  
was running.  
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting, the  
camera is faulty. Arrange for servicing.  
S014 Timer service started [info]  
Description  
Meaning  
starting timer (S014)  
The timer service was started.  
S015 Timer service shut down [info]  
Description  
Meaning  
shutdown timer (S015)  
The timer service was shut down.  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S311 Working error in external input/output service  
[err]  
S412 Timer service initialization error [crit]  
Description  
%1  
timer initialization error [%1] [%2] (S412)  
Error number  
Description  
%1  
cannot work extio [%1] [%2] [%3] (S311)  
Error number  
%2  
Cause of error  
%2  
Cause of error  
Meaning  
An error occurred in the initialization of the  
timer service.  
%3  
Error information  
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting, the  
camera is faulty. Arrange for servicing.  
Meaning  
An error occurred while the external input/  
output device service was running.  
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting, the  
camera is faulty. Arrange for servicing.  
S413 Timer service runtime error [crit]  
Description  
%1  
timer working error [%1] (S413)  
Error number  
S312 Working error in timer service [err]  
Description  
%1  
cannot work timer [%1] [%2] [%3] (S312)  
Error number  
Meaning  
An error occurred while the timer service  
was running.  
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting, the  
camera is faulty. Arrange for servicing.  
%2  
Cause of error  
%3  
Error information  
Meaning  
An internal error occurred in the timer service.  
RTP-related Messages  
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting, the  
camera is faulty. Arrange for servicing.  
R001 Startup of RTP distribution module [info]  
Description  
Meaning  
starting media_plane (R001)  
S410 Event service initialization error [crit]  
RTP distribution module started.  
Description  
%1  
event initialization error [%1] [%2] (S410)  
Error number  
R002 Stopping of RTP distribution module [info]  
%2  
Cause of error  
Description  
Meaning  
stopping media_plane (R002)  
Meaning  
An error occurred in the initialization of the  
event service.  
RTP distribution module stopped.  
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting, the  
camera is faulty. Arrange for servicing.  
R003 RTSP PLAY request received [info]  
Description  
PLAY received: client_IP=%1, profile=%2,  
num_of_sessions=%3(V=%4,A=%5,  
M=%6,BC=%7) (R003)  
S411 External input/output service initialization error  
[crit]  
Description  
%1  
extio initialization error [%1] [%2] (S411)  
Error number  
%1  
%2  
%3  
%4  
%5  
%6  
%7  
Client IP address  
Profile name of requested PLAY  
Total number of client sessions  
Total distribution count of Video stream  
Total distribution count of Audio stream  
Total distribution count of Metadata stream  
%2  
Cause of error  
Meaning  
An error occurred in the initialization of the  
external input/output device service.  
Countermeasure If the problem persists after rebooting, the  
camera is faulty. Arrange for servicing.  
Total distribution count of  
AudioBackChannel  
Meaning  
RTSP PLAY request was received.  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of Log Messages  
R004 RTSP TEARDOWN request received [info]  
R102 Information acquisition failure (RTP payload  
size) [notice]  
Description  
TEARDOWN received: client_IP=%1,  
profile=%2, num_of_sessions=%3(V=%4,  
A=%5,M=%6,BC=%7) (R004)  
Description  
cannot get parameter: RTP_payload_size  
(R102)  
%1  
%2  
%3  
%4  
%5  
%6  
%7  
Client IP address  
Meaning  
Information acquisition has failed (RTP  
payload size).  
Profile name of requested TEARDOWN  
Total number of client sessions  
R102 Information acquisition failure (IP address)  
[notice]  
Total distribution count of Video stream  
Total distribution count of Audio stream  
Total distribution count of Metadata stream  
Description  
Meaning  
cannot get parameter: IP_address (R102)  
Information acquisition has failed (IP  
address).  
Total distribution count of  
AudioBackChannel  
Meaning  
RTSP TEARDOWN request was received.  
7
R103 RTSP authentication failure [notice]  
Description  
Meaning  
RTSP authorization error (R103)  
RTSP authentication has failed.  
R005 Starting multicast [info]  
Description  
start multicast: profile=%1,  
num_of_sessions=%2(V=%3,A=%4,M=%5,  
BC=%6) (R005)  
R107 RTSP authentication failure or missing  
authentication information [notice]  
%1  
%2  
Client IP address  
Profile name of requested  
MulticastStreaming START  
Description  
RTSP Error: error_code=401: Unauthorized  
(R107)  
%3  
%4  
%5  
%6  
Total distribution count of Video stream  
Total distribution count of Audio stream  
Total distribution count of Metadata stream  
Meaning  
RTSP authentication has failed or  
authentication information is missing.  
R107 Insufficient resources [notice]  
Total distribution count of  
AudioBackChannel  
Description  
RTSP Error: error_code=503: Service  
Unavailable (R107)  
Meaning  
Multicast was started.  
Meaning  
Service unavailable due to insufficient  
resources.  
For example, the max. number of RTP  
connections exceeded.  
R006 Stopping multicast [info]  
Description  
stop multicast: profile=%1,  
num_of_sessions=%2(V=%3,A=%4,  
M=%5,BC=%6) (R006)  
R301 Distribution communication error [err]  
%1  
%2  
Client IP address  
Description  
%1  
message queue open error: %1 (R301)  
Profile name of requested  
MulticastStreaming STOP  
Modules that generate errors  
RTP_CTRL_QUEUE  
RTP_DATA_QUEUE  
VIDEO_CTRL_QUEUE  
VIDEO_DATA_QUEUE  
AUDIO_CTRL_QUEUE  
AUDIO_DATA_QUEUE  
EVENT_CTRL_QUEUE  
RECVQ_META  
%3  
%4  
%5  
%6  
Total distribution count of Video stream  
Total distribution count of Audio stream  
Total distribution count of Metadata stream  
Total distribution count of  
AudioBackChannel  
SENDQ_MEDIA  
Meaning  
Multicast was stopped.  
Meaning  
A communication error occurred between  
modules.  
Countermeasure If the problem persists after repeated  
attempts and rebooting, the camera may be  
faulty. Arrange for servicing.  
R101 RTP session timeout [notice]  
Description  
%1  
session timeout: session ID=%1 (R101)  
Session ID  
Meaning  
RTP session has timed out.  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R302 Parameter acquisition failure [err]  
Description  
%1  
cannot get parameter: %1 (R302)  
user_account: User account  
IP_address: IP address of the camera  
profile_media_configuration:  
MediaConfiguration information  
RTSP_port_number: RTSP port number  
Meaning  
Parameter acquisition has failed.  
R303 Metadata distribution initialization failure [err]  
Description  
Meaning  
metadata initialization error (R303)  
Metadata distribution initialization has failed.  
R304 Abnormal termination of client [err]  
Description  
delete session from some kind of error:  
client_IP=%1, session_ID=%2 (R304)  
%1  
Client IP address  
%2  
Session ID  
Meaning  
The client session terminated abnormally.  
R304 Client disconnected [err]  
Description  
connection reset by peer:  
client_IP=client_IP=%1 (R304)  
%1  
Client IP address  
Meaning  
Disconnected from client.  
R304 Client disconnected [err]  
Description  
RTP/HTTP connection closed by client  
(R304)  
Meaning  
Disconnected from client.  
R305 RTSP processing error [err]  
Description  
RTSP Error: error_code=500: Internal Server  
Error (R305)  
Meaning  
An RTSP processing error occurred.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of Viewer Messages  
Messages Displayed in the Information Field  
Messages displayed in the information field of the viewer are classified into the following three types.  
Icon  
Category  
Explanation  
Information Message  
Help messages on various buttons, pull-down lists, etc., as well as frame rate and other  
information from the camera are shown.  
Warning Message  
Error Message  
A message will be displayed notifying the user when camera control privileges cannot  
be obtained, the audio session stops, etc.  
7
Displayed when a system error occurs in the viewer.  
Information Messages  
Message  
Explanation  
Connection closed by the camera.  
The camera was disconnected.  
Audio connection has been closed.  
Camera control gained.  
The video session has continued after the audio session was disconnected.  
Displayed when camera control is obtained. You can operate the camera.  
Camera control lost.  
Displayed when camera control is released. You cannot operate the camera  
until you get camera control privileges again.  
Use the menu displayed by right-clicking to exit the full  
screen mode.  
When switched to full screen mode  
Recording to memory card aborted.  
When recording to memory card was completed successfully  
The connection was terminated because the password  
has been changed.  
When the password of the account used to connect to the camera was  
changed during camera connection and then any WV-HTTP command was  
issued  
Message  
Explanation  
{n}fps Pan: {p} Tilt: {t} Zoom: {z}  
Communicating with the camera normally  
The connection was terminated because the image has  
been flipped.  
When the video was flipped during camera connection (camera connection  
is terminated when a video is flipped)  
Message  
Explanation  
{n}fps Pan: {p} Tilt: {t} Zoom: {z}  
Communicating with the camera normally (when Digital PTZ is enabled)  
{n}fps  
Communicating with the camera normally (when Digital PTZ is disabled)  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Warning Messages  
Message  
Explanation  
Could not connect to the camera.  
The camera is busy.  
Connection failed due to an invalid IP address, etc.  
The connection limit was exceeded.  
Failed to get camera control privileges.  
The request for camera control privileges was denied because the camera  
was being used by the Admin Viewer, etc.  
Failed to establish audio connection.  
You are not connected to the camera.  
Connection for audio reception failed.  
An attempt was made to operate the camera when the camera was not  
connected.  
Please get camera control privileges.  
An attempt was made to operate the camera without camera control privileges.  
The Admin Viewer is already connected to the camera.  
Another user is already connected as an administrator.  
You do not have the camera access privilege.  
Cannot connect to the camera due to address restriction or outside service  
hours.  
Viewer is unavailable.  
You did not agree to the terms of use on the License Agreement screen.  
Recording to a memory card with insufficient capacity was attempted.  
Insufficient memory card capacity.  
Recording to memory card is not allowed.  
Recording to memory card failed because [Operation Settings] in [Memory  
Card Operations] was not set to [Save Logs and Videos].  
Recreating video management information.  
Video Management Information Recreation Required.  
Audio reception is restricted.  
Video management information for the memory card is being recreated.  
Video management information for the memory card must be recreated.  
Audio reception is being restricted.  
The specified camera is not a network camera, or it is not Displayed when connecting to a camera other than the specified camera  
a supported model.  
using admin tool with proxy authentication support.  
User authentication failed.  
Camera authentication failed.  
The viewer is already connected in another window.  
Cookie is not available or blocked on your web browser.  
The viewer is already available in another window.  
Cookie is not available or blocked on your web browser.  
JavaScript is not available or disabled on your web browser. JavaScript is not available or disabled on your web browser.  
No audio device.  
The [Audio] button has been clicked when there is no audio device or the  
audio device has been disabled in the computer.  
Failed to initialize Canon Network Camera Audio  
Receiver.  
ActiveX plugin is not installed within ten seconds after clicking the [Audio]  
button.  
Message  
Explanation  
You cannot control the camera unless you exit Viewer  
PTZ.  
The video was clicked with the Viewer PTZ in the OFF state while you have  
control privileges.  
Message  
Explanation  
Start Digital PTZ or Viewer PTZ.  
The PTZ sliders or the video display area were clicked with Digital PTZ or  
Viewer PTZ in the OFF state.  
Start Digital PTZ.  
The PTZ sliders or the video display area were clicked with Digital PTZ in the  
OFF state.  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Restore Default Settings  
It is recommended that you write down the settings for respective camera functions. If you have forgotten the settings and  
want to set the camera from the beginning, restore the factory default settings first.  
*For factory default settings, see p. 161.  
Restoring the Initial Setting from the  
Maintenance Page in the Web Browser  
Launch the web browser and display the settings  
menu.  
1
7
To display the settings menu, you need to enter the IP  
address of the camera, user name and administrator  
Except for the following items, all user-defined  
password (p. 32).  
settings will be discarded and restored to factory  
default settings after the camera is rebooted.  
– Network administrator password, LAN, IPv4, IPv6  
– Date and time  
– Host access restrictions for access control  
– SSL/TLS  
– 802.1X  
Caution  
You must not turn off the camera while it is  
performing the [Restore Default Settings]  
operation. Turning off the camera at this stage  
may result in disabling its ability to boot correctly.  
Once [OK] is clicked, you can no longer stop the  
process of restoring the default settings.  
On the Setting Menu page, click [Maintenance].  
2
3
The maintenance page appears.  
Restoring Factory Default Settings with  
the Reset Switch on the Camera  
If you have forgotten or do not know the IP address of the  
camera or your Administrator password, you cannot  
operate the camera via the network. In this case, press  
the reset switch at the back of the camera.  
For VB-S30D/VB-S31D/VB-S800D, remove the top  
cover.  
1
Click [Exec] under [Restore Default Settings].  
For top cover removal, see the “Installation Guide”  
included with the camera.  
A confirmation message appears, asking if you want  
to restore the default settings. To restore the default  
settings, click [OK].  
Turn off the camera.  
2
There is no on/off switch on the camera. Turn the  
camera on and off by plugging in or unplugging the  
LAN cable (PoE power supply).  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Turn on the power while pushing the reset switch, and  
keep pushing the reset switch for 5 seconds or more.  
For VB-S30D/VB-S31D/VB-S800D, attach the top  
cover.  
3
4
The reset switch is located in a recessed area. Push  
the switch using the tip of a slender object such as a  
clip.  
For top cover attachment, see the “Installation Guide”  
included with the camera.  
All settings of the camera, except for the date and  
time, are restored to factory default settings.  
Important  
If the reset switch is pushed, network-related settings will also  
be restored to factory default settings including the camera's IP  
address, subnet mask, default gateway address, etc.  
Accordingly, you can no longer operate the camera from the  
computer you were using to connect to the camera before.  
When initializing the camera, use the “VB Initial Setting Tool”  
installed in your computer to set an IP address appropriate for  
the environment in which the camera is used (See “Performing  
Reset Switch  
Reset Switch  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
List of Factory Default Settings  
Item  
Installation Location  
• Current Date and Time  
• Setting  
Setting  
Item  
Setting  
User Name (Administrator ID)  
Administrator password  
Path to setting pages  
root  
camera  
admin  
Setting Method  
Set manually  
• LAN  
LAN Interface  
Maximum Packet Size  
• IPv4  
Auto-Setting of NTP Server  
NTP Server  
Disable  
Auto  
1500  
Time Zone  
(GMT+09:00) Osaka,  
Sapporo, Tokyo  
7
IPv4 Address Setting Method  
IPv4 Address  
Manual  
Daylight Saving Time  
• Camera Name  
Disable  
192.168.100.1  
255.255.255.0  
Subnet Mask  
Camera Name (alphanumeric  
characters)  
Camera  
IPv4 Default Gateway Address  
AutoIP  
Enable  
• Initial Camera Settings  
AE Mode  
IPv4 Address (AutoIP)  
Auto  
• IPv6  
Slow Shutter  
Disable  
IPv6  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Shutter Speed  
Exposure Compensation  
Metering Mode  
Focus Mode  
1/100  
Auto (RA)  
0
Auto (DHCPv6)  
IPv6 Address (Manual)  
Prefix Length  
Center-Weighted  
Auto  
64  
Smart Shade Control  
Smart Shade Control Level  
White Balance  
R Gain  
Disable  
1 (weak)  
Auto  
IPv6 Default Gateway Address  
IPv6 Address (Auto)  
• DNS  
255  
Name Server Address 1  
Name Server Address 2  
B Gain  
255  
Noise Reduction  
Sharpness  
Standard  
3
Auto-Setting of Name Server  
Address  
Disable  
Disable  
Color Saturation  
Day/Night  
4
Host Name  
Manual  
Host Name Registration with  
DDNS  
• Camera Control  
Digital Zoom  
Disable  
5
Search Domain  
AGC Limit  
Search Domain List  
Smart Shade Control Strength  
(Auto)  
Medium  
• SNMP  
SNMP  
Community Name  
Disable  
public  
• Day/Night (when Auto is set)  
Switching Brightness  
Response (sec.)  
Standard  
20  
Administrator Contact  
Information  
• Installation Conditions  
LED Setting  
Administration Function  
Name  
VB-S30D  
VB-S31D  
VB-S800D  
VB-S900F  
Turn On  
Disable  
Image Flip  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Item  
Setting  
Item  
Setting  
• Camera Position Control  
Restricted to Presets  
Time display  
Disable  
No Restriction  
Position of time display  
Text display  
Upper left  
Display nothing  
Upper left  
Camera Position without Control Do not return to Home  
Position  
Position of text display  
Text string display  
Color of text  
• External Input Device  
Black  
White  
Device Name (alphanumeric  
characters)  
Color of text outline  
• External Output Device  
Color depth of text and outline Fill text and outline  
• RTP Server  
Device Name (alphanumeric  
characters)  
RTP  
Enable  
• All Videos  
RTSP Authentication Method  
RTSP Port  
Digest Authentication  
554  
Video Size Set  
1920 x 1080 / 960 x 540 /  
480 x 270  
• JPEG  
• Audio Multicast  
Multicast Address  
Multicast Port  
Video Quality: 480 x 270  
Video Quality: 960 x 540  
Video Quality: 1920 x 1080  
3
3
3
0.0.0.0  
0
0
Multicast TTL  
Video Quality:  
Digital PTZ  
• RTP Streaming 1  
Video Size  
3
480 x 270 JPEG  
Video Size: video Transmission  
480 x 270  
30.0  
Frame Rate  
5
Maximum Frame Rate: Video  
Transmission  
Multicast Address  
Multicast Port  
0.0.0.0  
0
Video Size: Upload / Memory  
card  
480 x 270  
Multicast TTL  
0
• H.264(1)  
Audio Transmission  
• RTP Streaming 2  
Video Size  
Disable  
Video Size  
480 x 270  
Bit Rate Control  
Video Quality  
Use bit rate control  
480 x 270 JPEG  
3
Frame Rate  
10  
Target Bit Rate (kbps)  
Frame Rate (fps)  
I Frame Interval (sec)  
• H.264(2)  
2048  
30  
1
Multicast Address  
Multicast Port  
0.0.0.0  
0
Multicast TTL  
0
Audio Transmission  
• RTP Streaming 3  
Video Size  
Disable  
H.264(2)  
Disable  
Video Size  
480 x 270  
480 x 270 JPEG  
Bit Rate Control  
Video Quality  
Use bit rate control  
Frame Rate  
15  
3
Multicast Address  
Multicast Port  
0.0.0.0  
Target Bit Rate (kbps)  
Frame Rate (fps)  
I Frame Interval (sec)  
• On-screen display  
Date display  
2048  
30  
1
0
Multicast TTL  
0
Audio Transmission  
• RTP Streaming 4  
Video Size  
Disable  
Disable  
480 x 270 JPEG  
Position of date display  
Format of date display  
Upper left  
YYYY/MM/DD  
Frame Rate  
30  
Multicast Address  
0.0.0.0  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of Factory Default Settings  
Item  
Multicast Port  
Setting  
Item  
Setting  
0
Notification  
Text Only  
Multicast TTL  
Audio Transmission  
• RTP Streaming 5  
Video Size  
0
Mail Server Name  
Mail Server Port  
Sender (From)  
Disable  
25  
H.264(1)  
Recipient (To)  
Frame Rate  
5
Authentication  
None  
Multicast Address  
Multicast Port  
Multicast TTL  
0.0.0.0  
User Name  
0
POP Server  
0
Subject  
Audio Transmission  
• General Upload  
Upload  
Disable  
Message Body  
7
• Video Server  
Maximum Number of Clients  
Camera Control Queue Length  
Upload Disabled  
30  
30  
0
Video Format  
JPEG  
Frame Rate  
1
0
Maximum Connection Time  
(sec.)  
Pre-event Buffer (number of  
frames)  
Camera Control Time (sec.)  
• Audio Server  
20  
Post-event Buffer (number of  
frames)  
0
Audio Transmission from the  
Camera  
Disable  
Pre-event Buffer (sec)  
Post-event Buffer (sec)  
• HTTP Upload  
0
0
Input Volume  
Voice Activity Detection  
Audio Input  
50  
Disable  
Line In  
Notification  
Notification Only with  
HTTP  
• HTTP Server  
URI  
Authentication Method  
HTTP Port  
Digest Authentication  
User Name  
80  
Proxy Server  
Proxy Port  
HTTPS Port  
443  
80  
• Video Record Setting  
Video Record Action  
• Volume Detection  
Volume Detection Event  
Detect Criteria  
Proxy User Name  
Parameter (query string)  
• FTP Upload  
Notification  
Upload  
Disable  
Video data upload with  
FTP  
The reference volume  
level or above  
FTP Server  
Reference Volume Level  
Detect Criteria Duration (sec)  
ON Event Operation  
50  
User Name  
0
PASV Mode  
Enable  
Disable  
Disable  
File Upload Path  
OFF Event Operation  
File Naming  
YYMMDDHHMMSSms  
Ongoing On Event Operation Disable  
Subdirectory Name to Create  
File Name to Create  
File Name to Create  
Maximum Number of Loops  
• E-mail Notification  
Preset  
None  
image.jpg  
video.mov  
0
Video Record  
E-mail Notification  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
External Device Output for  
ON Event  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Item  
Setting  
Item  
Setting  
External Device Output for  
OFF Event  
Disable  
Video Record  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
E-mail Notification  
External Device Output  
• External Device Output  
Operation Mode  
Normally Open  
Continuous  
1
• Timer 4  
Active Output Format  
Pulse Output Time (sec)  
• External Device Input  
External Device Input Event  
Operation Mode  
Timer Event  
Disable  
00:00  
Start Time  
End Time  
00:00  
Enable  
Repeat Interval  
None  
Normally Open  
Disable  
Video Record  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Active Event Operation  
Inactive Event Operation  
E-mail Notification  
External Device Output  
• Authorized User Account  
User List  
Disable  
Ongoing Active Event Operation Disable  
Preset  
None  
Video Record  
E-mail Notification  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
• User Authority  
Authorized User  
Privileged Camera Control  
Camera Control  
Video Distribution  
Audio Distribution  
Guest user  
External Device Output for  
Active Event  
Checked  
Checked  
Checked  
Checked  
External Device Output for  
Inactive Event  
Disable  
Disable  
Day/Night Mode Switching  
• Timer 1  
Timer Event  
Disable  
00:00  
Camera Control  
Video Distribution  
Audio Distribution  
• IPv4 Host Access Restrictions  
Checked  
Checked  
Checked  
Start Time  
End Time  
00:00  
Repeat Interval  
Video Record  
None  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Apply Host Access Restrictions Disable  
E-mail Notification  
External Device Output  
Day/Night Mode Switching  
Default Policy  
Authorize Access  
01: / 32 Yes  
02: / 32 Yes  
03: / 32 Yes  
04: / 32 Yes  
05: / 32 Yes  
06: / 32 Yes  
07: / 32 Yes  
08: / 32 Yes  
09: / 32 Yes  
10: / 32 Yes  
11: / 32 Yes  
12: / 32 Yes  
13: / 32 Yes  
14: / 32 Yes  
15: / 32 Yes  
Network Address / Subnet  
• Timer 2  
Timer Event  
Disable  
00:00  
Start Time  
End Time  
00:00  
Repeat Interval  
Video Record  
E-mail Notification  
External Device Output  
None  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
• Timer 3  
Timer Event  
Start Time  
Disable  
00:00  
00:00  
None  
End Time  
Repeat Interval  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of Factory Default Settings  
Item  
Setting  
16: / 32 Yes  
Item  
Setting  
Disable  
IPsec Set  
17: / 32 Yes  
18: / 32 Yes  
19: / 32 Yes  
20: / 32 Yes  
IPsec Mode  
Tunnel Mode  
Destination IPv4 Address  
Destination IPv6 Address  
Source IPv4 Address  
• IPv6 Host Access Restrictions  
Source IPv6 Address  
Apply Host Access Restrictions Disable  
Security Protocol  
ESP  
Default Policy  
Authorize Access  
Security Gateway IPv4 Address  
Security Gateway IPv6 Address  
Prefix / Prefix Length  
01: / 128 Yes  
02: / 128 Yes  
03: / 128 Yes  
04: / 128 Yes  
05: / 128 Yes  
06: / 128 Yes  
07: / 128 Yes  
08: / 128 Yes  
09: / 128 Yes  
10: / 128 Yes  
11: / 128 Yes  
12: / 128 Yes  
13: / 128 Yes  
14: / 128 Yes  
15: / 128 Yes  
16: / 128 Yes  
17: / 128 Yes  
18: / 128 Yes  
19: / 128 Yes  
20: / 128 Yes  
Destination Subnet Mask Length 16  
7
Destination Prefix Length  
IKE Pre-Shared Key  
16  
SA ESP Encryption Algorithm  
AES  
SA ESP Authentication  
Algorithm  
HMAC_SHA1_96  
SA ESP Encryption Key  
(outbound)  
SA ESP Authentication Key  
(outbound)  
SA ESP SPI (outbound)  
SA ESP Encryption Key  
(inbound)  
SA ESP Authentication Key  
(inbound)  
SA ESP SPI (inbound)  
SA AH Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96  
SA AH Authentication Key  
(outbound)  
SA AH SPI (outbound)  
SA AH Authentication Key  
(inbound)  
• IPsec  
SA AH SPI (inbound)  
• IPsec Set 2  
IPsec  
Auto Key Exchange  
• Auto Key Exchange Settings  
IPsec SA Encryption Algorithm  
IPsec Set  
Disable  
AES->3DES  
IPsec Mode  
Tunnel Mode  
IPsec SA Authentication  
Algorithm  
HMAC_SHA1_96  
Destination IPv4 Address  
Destination IPv6 Address  
Source IPv4 Address  
Source IPv6 Address  
Security Protocol  
IPsec SA Validity Period (min)  
480  
ISAKMP SA Encryption  
Algorithm  
AES->3DES  
ESP  
ISAKMP SA Authentication  
Algorithm  
SHA1  
Security Gateway IPv4 Address  
Security Gateway IPv6 Address  
DH Group  
Group 2  
ISAKMP SA Validity Period (min) 480  
• IPsec Set 1  
Destination Subnet Mask Length 16  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Item  
Setting  
Item  
Setting  
Destination Prefix Length  
IKE Pre-Shared Key  
16  
SA ESP Authentication Key  
(inbound)  
SA ESP SPI (inbound)  
SA ESP Encryption Algorithm  
AES  
SA AH Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96  
SA ESP Authentication  
Algorithm  
HMAC_SHA1_96  
SA AH Authentication Key  
(outbound)  
SA ESP Encryption Key  
(outbound)  
SA AH SPI (outbound)  
SA ESP Authentication Key  
(outbound)  
SA AH Authentication Key  
(inbound)  
SA ESP SPI (outbound)  
SA AH SPI (inbound)  
• IPsec Set 4  
SA ESP Encryption Key  
(inbound)  
IPsec Set  
Disable  
SA ESP Authentication Key  
(inbound)  
IPsec Mode  
Tunnel Mode  
Destination IPv4 Address  
Destination IPv6 Address  
Source IPv4 Address  
Source IPv6 Address  
Security Protocol  
SA ESP SPI (inbound)  
SA AH Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96  
SA AH Authentication Key  
(outbound)  
SA AH SPI (outbound)  
ESP  
SA AH Authentication Key  
(inbound)  
Security Gateway IPv4 Address  
Security Gateway IPv6 Address  
SA AH SPI (inbound)  
• IPsec Set 3  
Destination Subnet Mask Length 16  
Destination Prefix Length  
IKE Pre-Shared Key  
16  
IPsec Set  
Disable  
IPsec Mode  
Tunnel Mode  
SA ESP Encryption Algorithm  
AES  
Destination IPv4 Address  
Destination IPv6 Address  
Source IPv4 Address  
Source IPv6 Address  
Security Protocol  
SA ESP Authentication  
Algorithm  
HMAC_SHA1_96  
SA ESP Encryption Key  
(outbound)  
SA ESP Authentication Key  
(outbound)  
ESP  
Security Gateway IPv4 Address  
Security Gateway IPv6 Address  
SA ESP SPI (outbound)  
SA ESP Encryption Key  
(inbound)  
Destination Subnet Mask Length 16  
Destination Prefix Length  
IKE Pre-Shared Key  
16  
SA ESP Authentication Key  
(inbound)  
SA ESP SPI (inbound)  
SA ESP Encryption Algorithm  
AES  
SA AH Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96  
SA ESP Authentication  
Algorithm  
HMAC_SHA1_96  
SA AH Authentication Key  
(outbound)  
SA ESP Encryption Key  
(outbound)  
SA AH SPI (outbound)  
SA ESP Authentication Key  
(outbound)  
SA AH Authentication Key  
(inbound)  
SA ESP SPI (outbound)  
SA AH SPI (inbound)  
• IPsec Set 5  
SA ESP Encryption Key  
(inbound)  
IPsec Set  
Disable  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of Factory Default Settings  
Item  
Setting  
Tunnel Mode  
Item  
• 802.1X Authentication  
802.1X Authentication  
Authentication Status  
• Authentication Method  
Authentication Method  
User Name  
Setting  
IPsec Mode  
Destination IPv4 Address  
Destination IPv6 Address  
Source IPv4 Address  
Disable  
Stop  
Source IPv6 Address  
EAP-MD5  
Security Protocol  
ESP  
Security Gateway IPv4 Address  
Security Gateway IPv6 Address  
• Memory Card Operations  
Operation Settings  
Save Logs and Videos  
Destination Subnet Mask Length 16  
Video Format  
JPEG  
0
Destination Prefix Length  
IKE Pre-Shared Key  
16  
Pre-event Buffer (number of  
frames)  
7
Post-event Buffer (number of  
frames)  
0
SA ESP Encryption Algorithm  
AES  
SA ESP Authentication  
Algorithm  
HMAC_SHA1_96  
Pre-event Buffer (sec)  
Post-event Buffer (sec)  
Overwrite videos  
0
0
SA ESP Encryption Key  
(outbound)  
Disable  
SA ESP Authentication Key  
(outbound)  
SA ESP SPI (outbound)  
SA ESP Encryption Key  
(inbound)  
SA ESP Authentication Key  
(inbound)  
SA ESP SPI (inbound)  
SA AH Authentication Algorithm HMAC_SHA1_96  
SA AH Authentication Key  
(outbound)  
SA AH SPI (outbound)  
SA AH Authentication Key  
(inbound)  
SA AH SPI (inbound)  
• Certificates  
Certificate Status  
Country (C)  
Not Installed  
State/Province (ST)  
Locality (L)  
Organization (O)  
Organizational Unit (OU)  
Common Name (CN)  
Validity Period Start Date  
Validity Period End Date  
• Encrypted Communications  
SSL Communications  
Disable  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Camera  
Image Sensor  
1/4.85 type CMOS (primary color filter)  
1/3 type CMOS (primary color filter)  
Number of Effective  
Pixels  
Approx. 2.1 million pixels  
Scanning Method  
Lens  
Progressive  
3.5x optical (4x digital zoom) zoom lens with auto focus  
Fixed focal length lens (4x digital zoom)  
*1  
Focal Length  
F-number  
2.25 mm (W) to 7.88 mm (T)  
2.7 mm  
F1.4 (W) to F2.6 (T)  
F1.6  
Viewing Angle  
Horizontal: 77.7° (W) to 20.7° (T)  
Vertical: 40.4° (W) to 11.6° (T)  
Horizontal: 95.0°  
Vertical: 60.0°  
Horizontal: 96.0°  
Vertical: 60.5°  
Day/Night Switch  
Auto/Manual  
Min. Subject  
Illumination  
Day Mode  
(color)  
0.95 lux (F1.4, shutter speed 1/30 sec., smart shade control off, 50IRE)  
0.07 lux (F1.4, shutter speed 1/2 sec., smart shade control off, 50IRE)  
0.025 lux (F1.4, shutter speed 1/2 sec., smart shade control on [7], 50IRE)  
0.45 lux (F1.6, shutter speed 1/30 sec., smart shade control off, 50IRE)  
0.03 lux (F1.6, shutter speed 1/2 sec., smart shade control off, 50IRE)  
0.01 lux (F1.6, shutter speed 1/2 sec., smart shade control on [7], 50IRE)  
0.4 lux (F1.6, shutter speed 1/30 sec., smart shade control off, 50IRE)  
0.03 lux (F1.6, shutter speed 1/2 sec., smart shade control off, 50IRE)  
0.01 lux (F1.6, shutter speed 1/2 sec., smart shade control on [7], 50IRE)  
Night Mode  
(monochrome)  
0.5 lux (F1.4, shutter speed 1/30 sec., smart shade control off, 50IRE)  
0.04 lux (F1.4, shutter speed 1/2 sec., smart shade control off, 50IRE)  
0.015 lux (F1.4, shutter speed 1/2 sec., smart shade control on [7], 50IRE)  
0.25 lux (F1.6, shutter speed 1/30 sec., smart shade control off, 50IRE)  
0.02 lux (F1.6, shutter speed 1/2 sec., smart shade control off, 50IRE)  
0.007 lux (F1.6, shutter speed 1/2 sec., smart shade control on [7], 50IRE)  
0.2 lux (F1.6, shutter speed 1/30 sec., smart shade control off, 50IRE)  
0.02 lux (F1.6, shutter speed 1/2 sec., smart shade control off, 50IRE)  
0.007 lux (F1.6, shutter speed 1/2 sec., smart shade control on [7], 50IRE)  
Focus  
Auto/One-shot AF/Manual/Fixed at infinity  
Shooting Distance  
(from front of lens)  
0.3 m (12 in.) to infinity  
0.5 m (1.6 ft.) to infinity  
Shutter Speed  
1, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/15, 1/30, 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, 1/4000, 1/8000,  
1/16000 sec.  
Exposure  
Auto/Auto (Flickerless)/Auto (Shutter-priority AE)/Manual (Shutter Speed, Gain)  
White Balance  
Auto/Light Source (Daylight Fluorescent/White Fluorescent/Warm Fluorescent/Mercury Lamp/Sodium Lamp/  
Halogen Lamp)/Manual (One-shot WB/R Gain/B Gain)  
Metering Mode  
Center-Weighted/Average/Spot  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Specifications  
Camera  
Exposure  
9 levels  
Compensation  
Smart Shade Control Auto/Manual/Disable  
Auto: 3 levels  
Manual: 7 levels  
– Brightens shaded areas of a video  
5 levels  
AGC Limit  
Pan Angle Range  
Tilt Angle Range  
350° ( 175°)  
90° (ceiling-mounted position: -90° to 0°)  
– When the horizontal direction of the camera is 0°  
Rotation Angle  
Range  
180° ( 90°)  
7
Moving Speed  
Pan: Max. 120°/sec., Tilt: Max. 120°/sec.  
Server  
Video Compression  
Method  
JPEG, H.264  
Video Size  
JPEG, H.264: 1920 x 1080, 960 x 540, 480 x 270  
1280 x 720, 640 x 360, 320 x 180  
1280 x 960, 640 x 480, 320 x 240  
Video Quality  
JPEG, H.264: 5 levels  
*2  
Frame Rate  
JPEG: 0.1 to 30 fps  
H.264: 1/2/3/5/6/10/15/30 fps  
Max. Frame Rate  
When streaming JPEG, H.264 (1920 x 1080): 30 fps  
When used in the following combinations:  
When streaming H.264(1) (1920 x 1080) and H.264(2) (all sizes) simultaneously: 15 fps  
When streaming H.264(1) (all sizes) and H.264(2) (1920 x 1080) simultaneously: 15 fps  
When streaming H.264(1) (1280 x 960) and H.264(2) (1280 x 960) simultaneously: 15 fps  
When streaming H.264(1) (1280 x 720) and H.264(2) (1280 x 720) simultaneously: 15 fps  
I-Frame Interval  
0.5/1/1.5/2/3/4/5 sec.  
Simultaneous Client  
Access  
Max. 30 Clients + 1 Admin Client  
– H.264: Max. 10 Clients  
Camera Control  
Administrator, Authorized user, Guest user (level of control varies depending on user)  
Max. 50 user names and passwords registered for authorized users.  
Access Control  
User authority (user name and password), Host Access Restrictions (IPv4, IPv6)  
SSL/TLS, IPsec (Auto Key Exchange/Manual)  
Encrypted  
Communications  
IEEE 802.1X  
Protocol  
EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-PEAP  
IPv4: TCP/IP, UDP, HTTP, FTP, SNMP (MIB2), SMTP (Client), DHCP (Client), DNS (Client), ARP, ICMP, POP3,  
NTP, SMTP authentication, RTSP, WV-HTTP (Canon proprietary), ONVIF  
IPv6: TCP/IP, UDP, HTTP, FTP, SMTP (Client), DHCPv6 (Client), DNS (Client), ICMPv6, POP3, NTP, SMTP  
authentication, RTSP, WV-HTTP (Canon proprietary), ONVIF  
AutoIP  
Available  
Audio Compression  
Method  
G.711 µ-law (64 kbps)  
Audio  
Sound Transfer Protocol by Canon  
Communication  
Method  
Privacy Mask  
Number of registration: Max. 8 places, Number of mask colors: 1 (select from 9 colors)  
Available  
View Restrictions  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Server  
Presets  
Max. 20 positions  
Intelligent Functions  
Video:  
Detection Types: moving object detection, abandoned object detection, removed object detection, camera  
tampering detection, and passing detection  
Detection Settings: Max. 15  
Volume:  
Volume Detection  
Event Trigger Type  
Image Upload  
External Device Input, Timer, Intelligent Function (Video), Intelligent Function (Volume)  
FTP/HTTP/SMTP (e-mail)  
Temporary storage memory in camera: Max. approx. 5 MB  
Frame Rate: Max. 10 fps (JPEG)  
Max. 30 fps (H.264)  
Event Notifications  
HTTP/SMTP (e-mail)  
Available  
Camera Angle  
Settings  
Image Cropping  
Function  
Digital PTZ  
Cropping sizes: 640 x 360/512 x 288/384 x 216/256 x 144/128 x 72  
640 x 480/512 x 384/384 x 288/256 x 192/128 x 96  
On-Screen Display  
Available  
Daylight Saving Time Available  
Custom Settings Number of registers: 4  
Items to Reg.: Pan/Tilt/Zoom, Exposure, Smart Shade Control, Focus, White Balance, Image Quality  
Adjustment, Day/Night  
Number of registers: 4  
Items to Reg.: Pan/Tilt/Zoom, Exposure, Smart Shade Control, White Balance, Image Quality Adjustment,  
Day/Night  
Number of registers: 4  
Items to Reg.: Exposure, Smart Shade Control, White Balance, Image Quality Adjustment, Day/Night  
Language  
English/German/Spanish/French/Italian/Japanese  
“ONVIF” is a trademark of ONVIF Inc.  
Interface  
3
Network Terminal *  
LAN x 1 (RJ45, 100Base-TX (auto/full-duplex/half-duplex))  
Audio Input Terminal φ3.5 mm (φ0.14 in.) mini-jack connector (monaural)  
(common for LINE IN Switch LINE IN/MIC IN in the setting page.  
& MIC IN)  
LINE IN x 1 (connect to an amplifier microphone) or MIC IN x 1 (connect to a microphone without amplifier)  
External Device I/O  
Terminal  
Input x 1, Output x 1  
Memory Card  
microSD Memory Card, microSDHC Memory Card, microSDXC Memory Card Compatible  
Frame Rate:  
Max. 1 fps (JPEG)  
Max. 30 fps (H.264)  
Miscellaneous  
Operating  
Environment  
Temperature: -10 °C to +50 °C (+14 °F to +122 °F)  
Humidity: 5% to 85% (without condensation)  
Power Supply  
PoE: PoE power supply via LAN cable (IEEE802.3af compliant)  
Power Consumption  
Max. 7.8 W  
Max. 7.6 W  
Max. 4.1 W  
Max. 4.3 W  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Miscellaneous  
Dimensions  
(φ x H) φ120 x 54 mm (φ4.72 x 2.13 in.)  
– excluding projections  
(H x W x D) 54 x 32 x 114 mm (2.13 x 1.26 x 4.49 in.)  
– excluding projections  
Weight  
Approx. 270 g (9.6 oz.)  
Approx. 270 g (9.6 oz.)  
Approx. 240 g (8.5 oz.)  
Approx. 180 g (6.4 oz.)  
*1 (W): maximum wide angle, (T): maximum telephoto  
*2 Distribution capability values of the camera. The actual frame rate may drop depending on the performance of the  
computer running the Viewer, the number of clients connected at the same time, network load, video quality settings,  
and photographic subject.  
*3 LAN cables are category 5 or higher, with length 100 m or shorter.  
7
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Numerics  
A
Abandoned Object Detection ...........................105  
D
Day/Night Mode Switching ................................ 58  
B
BLC (Back Light Compensation) ......................128  
E
E-mail Notification .......................... 53, 57, 58, 104  
Encrypted Communications ............................... 66  
Exposure Compensation ...................... 42, 74, 136  
C
Camera Control Privilege Status Indicator ........126  
Camera Control Privileges ........................120, 126  
Camera Tampering Detection ...........................106  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
F
J
Factory Default Settings ........................... 159, 161  
L
G
M
7
Memory Card Information .......................... 70, 116  
Memory Card Operations ............................. 69, 70  
H
Host Access Restrictions ............................. 60, 61  
Message  
I
Installing the Necessary Software ...................... 26  
Intelligent Function Setting Tool ......................... 97  
IPv4 Host Access Restrictions ........................... 60  
IPv6 Host Access Restrictions ........................... 61  
N
O
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating the External Device Output ..............137  
Smart Shade Control Strength ........................... 44  
P
T
Privileged Camera Control ..........................60, 120  
U
R
Removed Object Detection ...............................106  
V
VB Initial Setting Tool ............................. 15, 26, 28  
Video Management Information ......................... 70  
Video Management Information Status .............. 70  
S
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BIE-7001-001  
© CANON INC. 2014  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Belkin Mouse F8E850 OPT User Manual
Belkin Stereo System F5U279 User Manual
Blomberg Refrigerator SOM 9650 User Manual
Bosch Appliances Clothes Dryer V20 UL User Manual
Briggs Stratton Air Cleaner 202400 User Manual
Briggs Stratton Automobile Parts 09P700 User Manual
Casio Camcorder Accessories EX Z90 User Manual
CDA Ventilation Hood CIN6 User Manual
Chicago Electric Power Hammer 40457 User Manual
Christie Digital Systems Projector 38 VIV212 User Manual